JP2017148127A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine including new amusement.SOLUTION: In a game machine, a specific game state includes a first specific game state with occurrence of a second special game state as a first shift condition and with execution of a predetermined number of variation display games as a second shift condition as shift conditions to other game states, and a second specific game state with occurrence of the second special game state as a shift condition as a shift condition to other game states. Specific game state generation means can generate the first specific game state after occurrence of the second special game state, and can generate the second specific game state in satisfaction of the second shift condition in the first specific game state. Second execution control means can derive a first special result as a result of a second variation display game when the second specific game state is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 130

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner is a predetermined special result.

  In a conventional gaming machine, when a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is a predetermined result, the variable prize winning device is converted from a closed state to an open state, thereby giving the player a game value. An assignable jackpot state can be generated (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-99315 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is necessary to generate a big hit state in order to give a game value to the player, and the gameability becomes monotonous.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having new gaming characteristics.

  In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a variable display device capable of executing a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on a winning of a game ball in the start winning area, and execution control of the variable display game A game control means that can be executed, and an effect control means that can execute effect control in the variable display device based on a control command from the game control means, and the result of the variable display game is a special result determined in advance. In the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player in the case, the starting winning area includes a plurality of first starting winning areas and a second starting winning area, and the special gaming state Can be generated when the result of the variable display game is a first special result, and the first special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player, and the result of the variable display game is the first 2 Special conclusion And a second special game state that can give a game value more advantageous to the player than the first special game state, wherein the game control means includes the first First execution control means for controlling the execution of the first variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area, and the second variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning area Second execution control means for performing execution control, and specific game state generation means for generating a specific game state capable of proceeding with a game in a situation more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the second special game state And the specific gaming state is a transition condition to another gaming state, the first transition condition is generated as the second special gaming state, and the execution of the variable display game a predetermined number of times is a second transition. The first specific gaming state as a condition and other games And a second specific gaming state that uses the occurrence of the second special gaming state as a transition condition, and the specific gaming state generating means is configured to generate the second special gaming state after the second special gaming state has occurred. The first specific gaming state can be generated, and when the second transition condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state can be generated, and the second execution control The means can derive the first special result as a result of the second variation display game when the second specific gaming state is executed.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, a gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of the various display parts of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 2 indicator. It is another figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 2 indicator. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the main process of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & winning prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation | variation monitoring process. It is a time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing. FIG. 2 is another time chart for explaining the abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. FIG. 7 is still another time chart for explaining the abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port 2 switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a routine process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a routine processing procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table which illustrates a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a loss probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation | variation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability variation frequency update process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 display process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process transfer setting process. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle hit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hits end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation | variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fixed frequency signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 small hits end process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 small hit | end process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of a single command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a change interruption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation resumption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a fluctuation | interruption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation resumption setting process. It is a time chart (timing chart) which shows a mode that a fluctuation | variation display game is forcibly terminated. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a fluctuation display game is interrupted and restarted. (A) Special figure 1 It is a time chart which shows the case where the fluctuation time timer of a special figure 2 variable display game is updated at the time of a stop of a variable display game. (B) It is a time chart which shows the case where it does not update. (A) Special figure 1 is a time chart showing a state in which a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the variable display game is not set. (B) Special figure 2 is a time chart showing how to set a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the variable display game. (A) Special figure 2 It is a time chart which shows a mode that the delay timer (wait time) of a special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set irrespective of the fluctuation display state of a game. (B) Special figure 1 is a time chart showing a state in which a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the variable display game is not set. It is a time chart which shows a process in case there is a possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will end at the same timing. It is a time chart which shows an example of a process when there is a power failure during interruption of the variable display game and the power failure is recovered (power on). It is a time chart which shows the other example of a process when there is a power failure during interruption of a variable display game, and a power failure is recovered | restored after that (power-on). It is a front view of the game board with which the game machine in a 2nd embodiment is equipped. It is a figure which shows the structure of the lamp display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of the various display parts which comprise the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the special prize apparatus unit of 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a front view of a special prize apparatus unit, (B) is a-plan view of a special prize apparatus unit. It is a perspective view of the special variable prize-winning device unit with the door of a 2nd embodiment closed. It is a perspective view of the special variable prize-winning device unit with the open / close door of the second embodiment in an open state. It is a disassembled perspective view of the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus unit of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the decoration part of 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a front view of a base member, (B) is a rear view of a front decoration member. It is a figure explaining the main-body part of 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a rear view of a base member, (B) is an exploded perspective view of a housing and an opening / closing door unit. It is a figure explaining the structure of the tongue-shaped member of 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a top view, (B) is a front view. It is a perspective view of the opening / closing door unit explaining the operation | movement to the front-back direction of the tongue-shaped member of 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a figure of the state which the tongue-shaped member advanced, (B) is the tongue-shaped member reversely moved. It is a figure of a state. It is a figure explaining the engagement shaft of 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a front view of an opening-and-closing door unit, (B) is sectional drawing of the tongue-like member and engagement shaft in the AA line. It is a bottom view of the opening / closing door unit of 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a figure of the state which the tongue-like member advanced, (B) is a figure of the state which the tongue-like member moved backward. It is a top view of the special variable prize-winning device unit with the door of a 2nd embodiment closed. It is a top view of the special fluctuation prize-winning device unit in a state where two game balls of the second embodiment are flowing down. It is a perspective view of the special variation prize-winning device unit in a state where two game balls of the second embodiment are flowing down. It is a figure explaining the rolling state of the game ball in the ball passage with the open / close door of the second embodiment closed, (A) is a front view of the special variable winning device unit, (B) is a cross section at A-A FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a table which illustrates the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the loss probability, and the probability variation probability in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability variation frequency update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time change frequency | count update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit completion | finish process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit completion | finish process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 small hits end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit completion | finish process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit completion | finish process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hits end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 small hits end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure. It is a time chart of operation | movement of the 1st special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus in small hit RUSH.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

(First embodiment)
[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

  Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

  Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when the variable display game is simply used, in this specification, the special figure variable display game is indicated.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

  Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a specific gaming state (short-time state), a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, big hit) in a variable display game (probability changing state, probability changing state), or a big hit state (special gaming state). The small hit gaming state (small hit state).

  Here, the probability variation state is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. There are things that continue until you win (falling lottery type).

  In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launching device can change the launching force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and can play the game in various launching modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. The firing mode includes left-handed (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a plate-like game board main body 30a serving as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. A display device 41 is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which the game balls passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. It has been. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b is the first start winning opening 36 or the first start winning opening 36. It is easy to win the 2 start winning opening 37.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The top effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 8) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 8).

  A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of a game ball in the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 7) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first start winning opening (first start winning area, special figure 1 starting opening, starting opening 1) 36 for giving a start condition (starting condition) for the special figure variation display game is provided. Is provided. When left-handed (normally hit), it becomes easier for the game ball to win (enter) the first start winning opening 36. In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (second start winning area, special figure 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided. When right-handed, the game ball can easily win (enter) the second start winning opening 37. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 or the second start winning opening 37, a special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  In the game area 32 below the second start winning opening 37, an attacker type that opens the lower large winning opening by rotating the upper end side to the front side by a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an open / close door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the big prize opening. In the lower prize winning opening, a lower prize winning switch 38a (see FIG. 7) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning prize opening.

  In addition, the game area 32 in the upper left of the center case 40 is of an attacker type that opens the upper prize winning opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling to the near side by an upper prize winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7). A second special variable winning device 39 (special electric accessory) having an open / close door 39c is provided. Similar to the first special variable prize-winning device 38, the second special variable prize-winning device 39 is in a state in which the big prize opening is closed (blocked state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (player). Game state advantageous to the player) and allowing the game ball to easily flow into the upper prize winning opening, thereby giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. In the upper prize opening, an upper prize opening switch 39a (see FIG. 7) (two in this embodiment) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.

  A game ball wins a prize at the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the lower special winning opening of the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the upper special winning opening of the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Then, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) discharges the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. The game area 32 below the first special variable winning device 38 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  In addition, in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game (a special figure 1 game), a special figure 2 a variable display game (a special figure 2). A collective display device 50 for executing a game)) is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units D1 to D20 that display information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 3).

  FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variable display game configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. And a fluctuation display section 52 (special drawing 2 indicator) (lamp D2). Further, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 53 (lamps D3-D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable prize-winning devices 38, 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and a special figure 1 variable display. It has a memory display section 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) (lamps D11-D14) for notifying the number of games started (held).

  Further, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit 55 (first game state display, probability state display unit) (lamps D15 to D18) for displaying that the winning probability state is a high probability state. ), A second gaming state display unit 56 (second gaming state indicator) (lamps D8-D10) that lights up when a big hit or a small hit occurs and informs that it is right-handed (when right-handed). Is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 corresponds to a later-described modified example, and a third game state display unit 57 (third game state display) indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is suspended. Device, interruption state display unit) (lamps D19, D20).

  FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating lighting states of various display units 53-57 (lamps D3-D20) constituting the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 displays the state of gaming machines corresponding to the lighting modes of the various display units 53-57. The round display part 53 (lamps D3-D7) is lit according to the number of rounds, and the memory display part 54 (lamps D11-D14) is lit according to the number of holds (starting memory number). The first gaming state display unit 55 (lamps D15 to D18) is turned on in a high probability state, is turned off in a low probability state, and the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) is turned on when right-handed. Turns off when left-handed (normally fired).

  Next, the game flow in the gaming machine 10 and details of the special figure variation display game will be described. In the present embodiment, the usual figure start gate is not provided, and the so-called universal figure change display game is not executed. The second start winning opening 37 is not provided with a movable member that opens and closes the second start winning opening 37.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills and the like arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, the second The winning prize opening 37, the first special variable prize winning device 38 or the second special variable prize winning device 39 is won, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the lowermost part of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port is set. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 via the payout device.

  As a basic way of gaming, in the normal gaming state, the player left strikes and the game ball is awarded to the first start winning opening 36 to start the special figure 1 variable display game. When this occurs, the player switches to the right hand and aims at the second start winning opening 37 or the big winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction for instructing whether the player should make a left or right strike. If the player does not follow the instruction, an error is notified by the display device 41 or the speakers 19a and 19b. Is possible.

  The winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the winning to the second start winning opening 37 are detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7) and the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7). The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this embodiment) as the limit, and the second start winning opening The game ball won in 37 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (1 in this embodiment).

  When detecting the starting winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure start winning memory (special figure start memory) for each predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the maximum value is maximum). Memorize up to 4 times). The number stored in the special figure 1 start winning memory (the special figure 1 starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be simultaneously executed (running) independently of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Special figure 2 start winnings during display game execution, big hit, etc. are disabled (detection of start port 2 switch 37a is disabled). Accordingly, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is not substantially accumulated, and the special figure 2 variation display game starts as soon as the special figure 2 start winning memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not played at the timing when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the fluctuation start condition (start condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game is satisfied. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 start winning memory number is not displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41. In addition, the structure which displays the special figure 2 start winning memory | storage number on the collective display apparatus 50 or the display apparatus 41 is also possible.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) with the special figure 1 display 51 on the basis of the winning to the first starting prize opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 or the second start memory. To do.

  The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are identified in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), special symbol 2 (special symbol 2)). This is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed independently of each other at the same time (both). If it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed in a stopped state), the other special figure variation display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped at the disengaged result.

  In the normal gaming state, when a game ball is won at the second start winning opening 37 by right-handed, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to change, but basically a long time fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes) occurs. Therefore, during this time, the big hit or the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of a 7 segment type display (lamp D1) constituting the special figure 1 display 51. As shown in FIG. The special figure 1 variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (here, the central segment and the point portion) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 1 display 51. In the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the outage result stop display (outage symbol, outlier display) is a display in which the center segment and the dot portion are lit. Special figure 1 Display of fluctuation display of big hit results (big hit symbol, big win display) of the game is a plurality of displays corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit (R) and the game state (normal state or probability change state) after the big hit ( (Design) can exist. There are several types of stop display (small hit symbol, small hit display) for the special game 1 variation display game, but the same one type of open pattern (open time, etc.) for the big prize opening due to the small hit ( (Special figure 1 small hit) only.

  In the present embodiment, for all types of jackpots, the probability variation state continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of the variable display game is executed after the jackpot ends. That is, the gaming machine is an ST (special time) machine, and the jackpot symbol is only the probability variation symbol.

  6A and 6B are diagrams showing lighting states of a 7 segment type display (lamp D1) constituting the special figure 2 display 52. FIG. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed by a fluctuation display in which the identification information (here, the central segment and the point portion) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 2 display 52. In the special figure 2 variable display game, the outage result stop display (out of symbol, out of line display) is a display in which the center segment is lit. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display The game's jackpot result stop display (hit symbol, jackpot display) is a number of displays corresponding to the number of rounds (R) and the gaming state (normal state or probability change state) after the big hit ( (Design) can exist. There are multiple types of stop display (small hit symbol, small hit display) of the small hit results of the special figure 2 variation display game, and there are three types of opening patterns (opening time etc.) of the big prize opening by the small hit (special figure) It is 1, 2, 3) per 2 small. In addition, the special winning holes 1, 2, and 3 for special figure 2 may differ in the winning prize opening (the upper winning prize opening or the lower winning prize opening). Any one opens in a predetermined opening pattern.

  In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, for example, a decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of numbers or the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest.

  When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of the above, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

  In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39 are energized to the lower large winning port solenoid (38b) and / or the upper large winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 7). The special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or several tens of seconds). That is, the big prize opening provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player opens many game balls. The privilege that it can be acquired is given.

  When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number at the time of winning detection is a small hit value), a special figure change display As a result of the game, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbols, and a small hit state is set. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In this embodiment, a big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

  In this case, the first special variable prize-winning device 38 and / or the second special variable prize-winning device 39 is energized to the lower big prize winning solenoid 38b and / or the upper big prize winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7). Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less).

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device (the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39) is set. That the condition device does not operate means that the specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big win, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

  Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are configured as separate displays, and each special figure variation display game may have an execution state (executed state) at the same time. If a big win or a small win occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (the special result or the specific result is derived and displayed in a stopped state), the other special figure fluctuation display game that is being executed Stop.

  As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In addition, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may both have the execution state (executed state) at the same time. When a big hit or a small hit occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed in a stopped state), the other decoration special figure variation display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped at the result of the loss.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (38a, 39a) is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference for a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach productions, and there is a possibility that a special result mode may be derived (different expected values). Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in a variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a jackpot for determining the jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including execution time of a fluctuation display game in a fluctuation display without various reach and reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. .

  Further, the CPU 111a obtains any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the first start prize port 36, and a second start prize port 37. Are connected to, and supplied from, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the upper special winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning apparatus 39. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, and the upper large winning port switch 39a are detected by the third input port 124. Is input.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Also, the second input port 123 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. A signal is input from the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12, and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Also, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. A first input port 122 is provided which takes in an overflow switch signal and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 and supplies the touch switch signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. Signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (lower large prize opening solenoid) 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the first special variation winning apparatus 38, and a solenoid (upper large prize opening) that opens the second special variable winning apparatus 39. A second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data of the solenoid 39b is provided.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the lower large winning port solenoid 38b and the upper large winning port solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal (driving). Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current draw side of 50, and a fourth driver that outputs an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 A driver 138d is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 serving as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 is supplied with power in the event of a power failure, a program ROM 321 including a program (production control program) executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and the like. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding stored contents at least, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 serving as time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date (date, date, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, turns on the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) includes a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a change command, a stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 via the command I / F 331. As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

  Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

  In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning port 37, and based on the start memory, the big hit judgment disturbance of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored. A numerical value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, and also displays the special game state (big hit) State). In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b or the movable of the second special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b. The member 39c is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening.

  Whether a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening, or whether a predetermined openable time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening Control (cycle game) where one round of opening the grand prize opening is achieved until any of the conditions is achieved, and this is repeated (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16, 8, 4, or 2). )I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result (a big hit result in the present embodiment) in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state (low probability state). Further, based on the result mode of either the special figure fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game), Even if it becomes, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short time state, control is performed so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is shortened. In the present embodiment, the high-probability state and the short-time state are configured to occur at the same time, but it is also possible to generate each independently and generate only one of them.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 performed at a predetermined time period (4 msec (milliseconds in this embodiment)). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the gaming microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (calling source routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. .

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. 9A and 9B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control apparatus 100, the step code (number) is represented as “A ***” or “S ***”.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power-on delay timer, the slave control means (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the program starts normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control apparatus 100 executes the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Determine (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

  In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time has ended, the game control apparatus 100 reads out and writes RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (the result of A1016 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 9B, and the process in the case of normal recovery (recovery) from the power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1023 in FIG. 9B and the initialization process is executed. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is changed. It is in an indefinite state indicating that it has not been confirmed.

  Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. The command at the time of power failure recovery includes a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decoration special figure 1 holding number command indicating the number of holdings of the special figure 1, a probability information command indicating the probability state, a screen specifying command, and the like. . The screen designation command is a command for designating the display contents of the display device 41. For example, when both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being processed at all times (when neither fluctuation nor hit operation is being performed). Is a command for waiting for a demo, and a recovery screen command otherwise.

  Also, in the command at the time of power failure recovery, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted as in the modified examples of FIGS. 82 to 89 described later (backed up to the RWM) In the case where there is a special figure game interruption flag), an interruption command (interruption command) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted or that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted is included. Good.

  On the other hand, when the processing of step A1023 is executed after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1023). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the process of step A1028. Commands at the time of RAM initialization include a model designation command, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command, and the like. In response to the RAM initialization command, the effect control device 300 displays a customer waiting demonstration on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization by the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b. (E.g. 30 seconds).

  In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1022 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1027 further include an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, a time reduction state A time information command indicating the number of remaining games is included.

  The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1028). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1028, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, the CPU 111a performs setting of a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

  Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random numbers according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) The initial value (start value) of random number 1, jackpot symbol random number 2)) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM (A1030), and interrupt is permitted (A1031). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle.

  In addition, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number employ a so-called “initial value changing method” in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. Each random number may be updated by a counter by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without overlapping until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update processing in step A1032, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of checking by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus (A1033), and monitoring the power failure. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1034). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1034 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process of step A1032. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1032) (A1031), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step A 1032 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1034 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1033. Determine (A1035). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is “N”), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1036), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A1037).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection region check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1038), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (A1039). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is executed (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

  In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) operable from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1040 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as a calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (A1107).

  If the checksum calculation has not ended (the result of A1107 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is terminated.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1032 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

  The game control device 100 updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by one (A1201). Then, the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), and the initial value random number update process is terminated.

  Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is the random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit symbol stop symbol It is.

  As described above, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM head address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing for inputting from various sensors and switches, capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) is executed (A1304). If a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, and the upper large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) (A1308).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring a winning at the start port by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A1309). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1310), and then the special figure 2 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1311). Details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

  Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1312). Details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1313). Further, radio wave fraud monitoring processing (board radio wave fraud monitoring processing) for checking whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is executed (A1314). Details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1315). Details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that, when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, the interrupt is permitted after the external information editing process. Or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of input processing.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read state of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, a switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares an address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares an address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, a switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and saved in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area ( (A1504). Thereafter, the process waits until a delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and saved in the port input state 2 of the target switch control area ( (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same state bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (A1510), and the determinate bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed to confirm this time Bits are set (A1511).

  Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same status bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt The logical product with the definite state is calculated and used as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the current confirmed bit and the previous held bit and saves it as the current confirmed state (A1514). Further, an exclusive OR of the previous state and the final state is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process ends.

  If the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but in such a case, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that it cannot be determined correctly. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

  The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off-data to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). The acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire (A1610), and finally synthesizes them. Data is output to the external information / firing permission signal output port 137 (A1611). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1612). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1613).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test fire test apparatus, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output (A1614). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1615). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1616), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of payout command transmission processing.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is classified by the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 13 winning balls, 14 winning balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the number of counts in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 receives a winning that is a check target among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers in all the winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

  When all the checks are completed (the result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1704), and the winning number counter area 2 The payout number corresponding to the address is acquired (A1705). Then, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area as a new prize ball remaining number (A1707). Note that as the value of the remaining prize ball area before the processing of step A1707, a fraction that has not reached a predetermined number as a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not equal to or greater than 0 (the result of A1709 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by 1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (A1711). Further, the process returns to step A1708.

  Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A1712), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy state flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in an on state (busy state). It is said. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start payout control. Any one of a state, a busy state where the payout control cannot be started immediately, and an undefined state where the state is undefined is set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (the result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the payout command transmission process. When not busy, the idle state and the undefined state are included. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (the result of A1714 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether the winning number counter area 1 has a count, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When there is no count number (the result of A1715 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether or not the count number has been checked (A1717). If all checks are completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and the processes from step A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1718), and the target winning number counter A payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control apparatus 100 can start the payout control with a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) can start payout control. In this case, a prize ball command transmission means for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means is provided.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have a function to do so, it is possible to realize accurate payout control.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present embodiment, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the general winning port 35, the first special variable winning device 38). , A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), and a game based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) that performs payout control of the ball, and the game control means outputs a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. Based on (busy signal), a control is performed to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, a status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means Is output In response to the fact that the prize signal is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39). A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) is provided for each prize ball number, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls is transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). Before the identification of whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. I will do it.

  In addition to performing overall game control, a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). ) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the game ball, and a payout control for performing game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control device 200), and the game control means can start the payout control with a status signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area. Prize ball containing information about And an external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the number (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is configured so that the status signal output from the payout control means is a payout control means. The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 37, general winning port 35). The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) generate a prize ball command as a unit, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200). Is memorable Updates are made when a game ball is won in a predetermined winning area, and the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in response to the transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

  When the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A1804. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806), and the random number update process 1 is completed.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2, 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both. Target and update every time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number to be updated from among a plurality of random numbers to be updated (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as “masked value”) and set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

  In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte as “0” as the addition value and sets the lower 1 byte. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is to prevent the masked value from being “0” and to prevent the value from changing by adding “0”.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “Y”), the value of the random number area to be updated (2 bytes) is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random value, and whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

  If the new random number value is not greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 places the new random value in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (A1914). A random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “N”), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random value (or a value if a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number update process 2 ends.

  In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Accordingly, the CPU 111a, among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, changes the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process. The prize opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper prize winning switch 39a (two pieces) in the upper prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) (A2001). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the fraud monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal Information of a winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), a winning mouth monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening monitoring table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning opening monitoring tables are prepared according to the respective switches to be monitored.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower major prize opening switch 38a in the lower major prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) (A2003). Then, the illegal winning / winning monitoring process for monitoring the illegal winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win (A2005). ), A winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process (A2007). In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the special figure 2 fluctuation number) is counted as the abnormal fluctuation number in the normal gaming state (at a low probability), and the abnormal fluctuation number is a predetermined value ( For example, when reaching 5), the effect control device 300 is caused to execute error notification. Details of the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored and signals to be monitored this time (A2008). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2009). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2010). Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball break error) based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the dispensing abnormality status signal (dispensing abnormality error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. When the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave improper signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2013 is “N”), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2013 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2014), and an error has occurred. A game machine state check process for determining the state of the machine is executed (A2015).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (a payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016). ), The winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated. Details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Note that the processing from steps A2014 to A2016 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2014 to A2016 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2002 and A2004 in the prize opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on the lower big prize opening switch 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the upper big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39. As for the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39), since it is easy to perform fraud in which the opening and closing member is forcibly opened and a game ball is inserted to pay out the prize ball, fraud is monitored in addition to detection of the prize. .

  First, the game control device 100 checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error (A2101), and determines whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large winning port switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper large winning port switch 39a.

  Then, when it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2103 is “N”), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the illegal winning number after addition is determined to be the fraudulent occurrence of the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number is more than 5 (for example, 5) (A2105).

  The reason why the number of judgments is five is that, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is won or a signal is noisy and not to be judged as illegal, and an error is not easily determined even though it is not illegal.

  If the number is not equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number (A2106), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud generation command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud winning generation flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and the number of winnings for setting the winning ball Counter update processing is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), if the target notification timer is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the error monitoring target winning port switch is one of the upper prize winning port switches 39a, and is permitted when the error monitoring target winning prize port switch is the other upper prize winning port switch 39a. Not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification for the second special variable winning device 39, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that when the prize monitor switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large prize opening switch 38a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud release command is prepared (A2116), and the fraud flag The illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared (A2117). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  The game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize winning monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

  In addition, the game control device 100 does not execute the processing of step A2119 or when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (the result of A2120 is “N”), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (A2121), and command setting processing is performed. Is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.

  Through the above process, a fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when a fraud occurs, and a fraud release command is transmitted to the production control device 300 along with a fraud release, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of winning number counter update processing. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning port switches to be monitored from the winning port monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (more accurately, an input change) to the target winning port switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is “N”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2212).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203) and sets the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). Further, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2205).

  If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2209). If no overflow occurs (the result of A2209 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the process of step A2206 is completed or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is “Y”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2212).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2212 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning prize switch. If all the switches have been monitored (the result of A2212 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2301). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

  If the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2302 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

  When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2302 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A2301.

  Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2304), and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2305 is “Y”), the process returns to step A2304.

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2305 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) in the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets the production command. The process ends.

  As described above, the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, so that the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Variation Monitoring Processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is executed in step A2007 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A2401). As will be described later, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game starts in a low probability state (including the normal game state). When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2401 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2407.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A2402) and updates the special figure 1 fluctuation number by one ( 1 is added) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (A2404). If the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

  If the special figure 1 variation number is equal to or greater than the specified value (the result of A2404 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (subtracts 1) if the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is not 0 (A2405). The special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (A2406).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407). When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2410. As will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts in a low probability state (including a normal game state).

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A2408) and updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number by one. (A2409). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 5) (A2410).

  When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (the result of A2410 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 subtracts 1 from the special figure used in the determination of step A2410. (A2411). Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is set in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer as an error notification timer (A2412), and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is prepared ( A2413), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is prepared as an effect command (A2414), and the process proceeds to step A2419.

  When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer by −1 (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer has expired (A2416). If the time is not up (result of A2416 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

  When the time is up (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (A2417) and prepares a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command as an effect command (A2418). . Next, it is determined whether or not the prepared flag is the same as the current special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area value (A2419). When the prepared flag is the same as the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value (result of A2419 is "Y"), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

  When the prepared flag is different from the current special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area value (result of A2419 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag. Is determined (A2420). When the prepared flag is not a release flag (the result of A2420 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2422.

  When the prepared flag is a release flag (the result of A2420 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 clears the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number to 0 (A2421). That is, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is set in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag is prepared (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0. To do. Thereafter, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area in the RWM (A2422). That is, if the prepared flag is different from the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area flag, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is rewritten with the prepared flag. Next, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2423), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

  When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, an external information editing process described later is performed. Thus, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the production control device 300 receives the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command as the production command, the production control device 300 performs error notification on the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

  In the normal gaming state (the probability of a big hit is low), the player usually aims to win the first start winning opening 36 by left-handed, but the second start winning opening 37 rather than winning the first starting winning opening 36. When the player wins an advantage to the player (when the probability of a small hit is high), the player may aim at the second start winning port 37 by right-handed. In this case, a special figure 2 variable display game may be executed by winning at the second start winning opening 37, and an error notification is given to stop the player from making a right strike. In the normal gaming state, when left-handed is performed, the processing is performed in the normal route as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 23, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (that is, error notification) is not generated. 2 does not start the abnormal fluctuation notification timer.

  With reference to the time charts of FIGS. 24A to 24C, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process will be further described. 24A to 24C illustrate the result of the above-described special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed a plurality of times in the normal gaming state (the hit probability is low), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a specified value (here, 5) (A2410). The result is “N”), the initial value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (60 seconds) and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is received. The control device 300 can start notification of an error using the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

  Thereafter, since the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 is subtracted by 1 from the specified value (here, 5) (A2411), unless the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set again, the next special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is performed. The special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer is continuously updated by -1 and can be counted (the result of A2410 is "Y"). The effect control device 300 can continue the error notification until the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer expires after a period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value elapses and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is received. Even during error notification, award balls are paid out.

  During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify the occurrence of an error to an external device such as a hall computer. A machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process described later).

  When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer reaches the specified value (here, 5) again while the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is counting (error notification), the initial value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is reset again. The error notification for 60 seconds can be started from there (timer reset). When a big hit occurs (start), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is transmitted, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number are cleared to 0 (a special figure display described later). Intermediate processing, fanfare / interval intermediate processing transition setting processing).

  In FIG. 23, the variation check flag is set when the special figure variation display game starts in the low probability state, but the variation check flag has won the start winning opening in the low probability state. Control may be performed as set in the case. In this case, as shown in FIG. 24B, control is performed using the number of winnings instead of the number of fluctuations, and there are a plurality of winnings (special figure 2 winnings) at the second start winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state. Error notification can be started when the number of abnormal winnings in FIG. 2 reaches a specified value (here, 5).

  In the control of FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 24A, after the error notification by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is completed, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to 0 (A2421), but as shown in FIG. FIG. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations (abnormal winnings) may be maintained at a specified value.

 In FIG. 24C, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value (18 in this case) (the result of A2404 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by −1 and decreased from, for example, 4 to 3. (A2405) shows a situation where the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 (A2406). In this way, in the normal gaming state (the probability of hitting is low), even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed a plurality of times by right-handed and the number of abnormal fluctuations in special figure 2 rises, the player is left-handed When the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 reaches a specified value by returning (stopping right-handing), the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 is reduced, and error notification can be avoided.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed in steps A2010, A2012, and A2015 in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is the same as described in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the check target signal is ON (A2502). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2502 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2504). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error signal, and indicates a non-touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the check target signal is on (result of A2502 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as the state flag (A2506), acquires the target state on command, and prepares (A2507). Further, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2505 or step A2508 is completed, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2509). If they do not match (the result of A2509 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2511).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2512). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2514). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2515). If they match (A2515 result is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2515 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2516). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2016 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2601). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (the result of A2601 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an idle state flag as the determination status (A2602), and sets an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2603). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2601 is “Y”), a busy state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2604), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2605). ).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (ON / OFF) of the current payout busy signal (A2606). If they match (the result of A2606 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2609. If they do not match (the result of A2606 is “N”), the current payout busy signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (A2607), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2608).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by 1 (A2609), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2610). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  When the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (result of A2610 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value by 1 smaller than the timer comparison value (A2611). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2612), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  In the payout busy signal check process, a payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the timer comparison value. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1309) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winnings to the first starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), and executes hard random number acquisition processing for acquiring hard random numbers. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize at the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2703 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2709.

  When there is a start opening prize to the first start winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is in a low probability state (A2704). . If it is a low-probability state (including the normal gaming state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2707.

  The game control device 100 prepares a right-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A2705) when the occurrence probability of hit is not in a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) (result of A2704 is “N”). Command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the production control device 300 can display a right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed as a warning on the display device 41 when there is a starting-open winning to the first starting winning-winning port 36 in a high probability state. it can.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning in the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes the special drawing start opening 1 switch process (A2708). ).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a start port 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring a winning at the second start winning port (start port 2) 37 (A2709), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the second start winning opening 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  When there is a start opening prize to the second start winning opening 37 (the result of A2711 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is in a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state). Determine (A2712). When it is not a high probability state (when it is a low probability state) (the result of A2712 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a big hit state is being established (A2713). When it is not in the big hit state (result of A2713 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (A2714). Whether or not a high-probability final change is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final change flag set in a high-probability change number update process described later.

  Here, the high probability final change (high probability final change) is a final special figure change display game when the special figure change display game starts in a high probability state. For example, ST (special time) This is a final special figure variation display game in a case where a high probability state is maintained for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of variation start after the big hit.

  If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final variation (the result of A2714 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A2715), and executes an effect command setting process (A2716). Thereby, the production control device 300 displays a left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed on the display device 41 as a warning when there is a starting-open winning for the second starting winning-winning port 37 during the normal gaming state. Can do.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning in the second start winning opening 37 (starting opening 2) (A2717), and executes the special drawing start opening 2 switch process (A2718). ), The start port switch monitoring process is terminated. When the gaming control device 100 is in a high probability state (result of A2712 is “Y”), is in a big hit state (result of A2713 is “Y”), is in a high probability final change (result of A2714) Is “Y”), the process of steps A2717 and A2718 is executed without preparing the left-handed instruction notification command.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets start port no-win information indicating that there is no start port win (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802). If there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2710.

  When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) and determines whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register. Is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

  When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805). Information on the presence of a winning entry indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). The prepared jackpot random number is used in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special start port 1 switch process (A2708) in the aforementioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 1 switch process.

  The game control device 100 first loads the start port 1 signal output count, which is the number of times that information related to the number of wins to the start port 1 switch 36a is output to the management device external to the gaming machine 10 (A2901). Further, the value of the loaded start port 1 signal output count is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903).

  When the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the start port 1 signal output number area of the RWM (A2904). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure hold (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port 1 switch 36a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). If the number of special figure hold is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure start port 1 switch process is terminated.

  The game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906) and updates the special figure 1 hold number by +1 when the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”). (A2907). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including sorting of prefetched variation patterns).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (A2908), and saves the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the RWM big hit random number storage area (A2909). ). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2910), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911). Further, the small hitting design random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting design random number storage area of the RWM (A2912). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM ( A2913).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure hold information determination process (prefetch process, pre-determination process) for determining the special figure hold information (A2914), and the special figure 1 hold number indicating the special figure 1 hold number. A command is prepared as an effect command (A2915), an effect command setting process is executed (A2916), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is terminated. Details of the special figure hold information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view start port 2 switch process (A2718) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port 2 switch process.

A start port 2 signal output count, which is the number of times information related to the number of winnings to the start port 2 switch 37a, is output to the management device external to the gaming machine 10 is loaded (A3001). further,
The loaded start port 2 signal output count value is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A3003).

  When the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the start port 2 signal output count area of the RWM (A3004). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning to the second starting winning port 37 is invalid, that is, whether or not the detection of the starting port 2 switch 37a is invalid (A3005). It should be noted that the big hit fluctuation / small hit fluctuation is stopped (during special chart display processing described later), the big hit state (from the big hit fluctuation stop to the later big hit end processing), and the small hit state (from the small hit fluctuation stoppage) When the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during variation), even if a game ball has entered the second start winning opening 37, the second start is performed. The winning opening 37 is treated as invalid and invalidated. When the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is invalid (the result of A3005 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the special figure starting opening 2 switch process.

  On the other hand, when the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalid (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 holding number to 1 (A3006). Note that the special figure 2 variable display game starts as soon as the special figure 2 start memory is generated, but the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 for the necessity of control. Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 start storage (A3007), and saves the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (A3008). .

  Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). Further, the small hit design random number is extracted and saved in the small hit design random number storage area of the RWM (A3011). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2, 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM (A3012). The two-switch process is terminated.

  As described above, since the special figure 2 variation display game starts as soon as the special figure 2 start memory is generated, the special figure start opening 2 switch process is different from the special figure start opening 1 switch process. The special figure hold information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process) is not performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is not prepared.

  In this way, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning areas of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and extracts the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start storage serving as an execution right is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) performs first start storing (with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit of various random numbers extracted based on winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 ( Special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 start winning memory), and various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37, up to a predetermined number (here 1) 2 is stored as a start memory (a special figure 2 start memory, a special figure 2 start winning memory).

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2914) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure hold information determination processing (prefetching processing, pre-determination processing). Note that the special figure hold information determination process is executed only for the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3101). If it is not a high probability state (the result of A3101 is “N”), it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state (A3102). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A3102 is “N”), the big hit determination process is executed based on the big hit random number value stored as the first start memory (A3103).

  In addition, when it is in a high probability state (result of A3101 is “Y”) or is in a big hit state (result of A3102 is “Y”), the special figure hold information determination processing does not perform the big hit determination processing or the like The process is terminated as it is (prejudgment (prefetching) is not performed).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3104). When the determination result is a big hit (result of A3104 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (A3105), the big hit stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (A3106), and step A3111 Move on to processing.

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (out of case) (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random number value stored as the first start memory. The process is executed (A3107), and it is determined whether the determination result is a small hit (A3108). In this embodiment, a big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination.

  When the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets stop symbol information for the small hit (A3109), and the determination result is not a small hit (A3108). Is “N”), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3110).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes an effect command setting process (A3112). Then, a special figure 1 information setting process (A3113) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a special figure 1 for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The variation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed. Subsequently, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A3115), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3116).

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3201). When the special figure 2 variable display game is neither in the big hit state nor in the small hit state (the result of A3201 is "N"), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, a game ball is played by the lower big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 or the upper big prize opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39. Monitor detection.

  Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A3203). The special figure 1 game processing timer is timed by the interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interruption process by -1 update. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. When the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the process of step A3203 is performed without performing the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). When the special figure 1 game process timer is not 0 (the result of A3204 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3219.

  When the special figure 1 game process timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 game process number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3205). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3206). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3207).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and sets the effect. Or the special figure 1 usual process which performs the setting etc. of information required in order to perform the special figure 1 fluctuation process is performed (A3208). Details of the special figure 1 routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time for the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process. The special figure 1 changing process to be executed is executed (A3209). Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of jackpot, The special chart 1 display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning prize opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is executed (A3210). Details of the special figure 1 display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, and processes information necessary for performing the big prize opening opening process. Processing during fanfare / interval for setting and the like is executed (A3211). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if the final round is, A process for opening a special prize opening is performed to set information necessary for performing the special prize remaining ball process (A3212). Details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “5” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for the big hit end processing is executed (A3213). Details of the winning prize remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “6” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or information necessary for executing special figure 1 routine processing. The special figure 1 big hit end processing which performs the setting etc. is executed (A3214). Details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “7” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. The small hit fanfare process is performed (A3215). Details of the small hitting fanfare process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “8” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a process for setting a small hit end command, information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3216). Details of the small hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “9” in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and a special figure 1 small hit end process. The small hit remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for the execution is executed (A3217). Details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “10” in step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets information for special figure 2 game wait time (described later) or information necessary for executing special figure 1 routine processing. The special figure 1 small hit end processing which performs the setting etc. is executed (A3218). Details of the special figure 1 small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the special figure 1 game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3219), and then displays the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process related to the container 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3301). When the special figure 2 variable display game is neither in the big hit state nor in the small hit state (the result of A3301 is “N”), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, a game ball is played by the lower big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 or the upper big prize opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39. Monitor detection.

  Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A3303). The special figure 2 game process timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by -1 update. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. When the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process of step A3303 is performed without performing the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). When the special figure 2 game process timer is not 0 (the result of A3304 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3322.

  When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the gaming control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (A3305). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is “N”), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by −1 (A3306), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. A timer value for long variation (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3307). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is long fluctuation and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the timer of the fluctuation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3303-A3307 In this process, the long variation timer value is counted for the number of repetitions, and a timer with a long variation time for a special figure 2 variation display game is prepared.

  The game control apparatus 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y") and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y") The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number, and a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is executed (A3310).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the special figure 2 variable display game, sets the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and sets the effect. Or the special figure 2 usual process which performs the setting etc. of information required in order to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation process is performed (A3311). Details of the special figure 2 routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time for the special figure 2, information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, and the like. The special figure 2 changing process to be executed is executed (A3312). Details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of jackpot, A special figure 2 display process is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of the big hit, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process (A3313). Details of the special figure 2 display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of opening, and processes information necessary for performing the big prize opening opening process. Processing during fanfare / interval for setting and the like is executed (A3314). The fanfare / inter-interval process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if the final round is, A process for opening a grand prize opening is performed to set information necessary for the process of remaining a big prize opening ball (A3315). The special winning opening opening process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for the big hit end processing is executed (A3316). The special winning opening remaining ball process is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “6” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 2 jackpot ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process ( A3317). Details of the special figure 2 big hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “7” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. The small hitting fanfare process is performed (A3318). It should be noted that the small hitting fanfare process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “8” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process for setting a small hit end command, information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3319). Note that the small hitting process is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “9” in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and a special figure 2 small hit end process. The small hit remaining sphere process for setting information necessary for the execution is executed (A3320). The small hit remaining ball process is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “10” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). Details of the special figure 2 small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the special figure 2 game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3322), and then displays the special figure 2 display. The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A3202, A3302) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the upper prize winning opening (second special variable winning prize apparatus 39) is being opened (A3401). If the upper prize winning opening is not being opened (the result of A3401 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is being performed (A3402). When the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is not in progress (the result of A3402 is “N”), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is being opened (A3403). In the case of the big hit state or the small hit state, the upper big prize port and / or the lower big prize port can be open.

  When the lower large prize opening is being opened (the result of A3403 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch (A3404), When there is an input (the result of A3404 is “Y”), a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process is set to 1 (A3405). When the lower prize winning opening is not being opened (A3403 result is “N”) or when there is no input to the lower prize winning switch (A3404 result is “N”), the special prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 is in the case where the upper prize winning opening is being opened (the result of A3401 is “Y”), or in the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening (the result of A3402 is “Y”). ), The winning counter is set to 0 (A3406). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 among the upper prize winning switch 39a (A3407). When there is no input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (the result of A3407 is “N”). ), The process proceeds to step A3411.

  When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (the result of A3407 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a prize winning count command as an effect command in order to produce an effect by winning (A3408). The effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is updated by one (A3410).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (A3411). If there is no input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (the result of A3411 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3415. When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (the result of A3411 is “Y”), a prize winning count command is prepared as an effect command to perform an effect by winning (A3412), and an effect command setting process is executed. (A3413), and the winning counter is updated by one (A3414).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415). If the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3415 is “N”), the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed. It is determined whether or not (A3416). When the winning prize remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3416 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A3417). When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3417 is “N”), the value of the winning counter (in this case, 1 or 2) is added to the number of the big winning mouth count (A3418).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 has the winning counter remaining 0 (the result of A3415 is “Y”), the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3416 is “Y”), or the small hit remaining When the ball process is in progress (the result of A3417 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the number of the big prize mouth count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, 9) (A3419). Is less than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning prize count is greater than or equal to the upper limit (the result of A3419 is “Y”), the winning prize count is kept at the upper limit (A3420), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3421). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit is being opened (A3422). If the big hit is not being opened (the result of A3422 is “N”), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the big hit is being released (the result of A3422 is “Y”), the big hit opening operation end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3423), and then the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 routine process (A3208) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the routine of the special figure 1 routine.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can be changed (A3501). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not possible to start fluctuation (when the fluctuation start is impossible) (the result of A3501 is “N”), the special figure 1 normal processing number “0” is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM. Save (A3502). Here, from the end of the big hit change of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (during the special figure 2 display process) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 2 big hit end process), and the small figure of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game From the end of the hit variation (during the special figure 2 display process) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 2 small hit end process), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game cannot be changed.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the left hand instruction has been notified (A3503). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as the effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. If the left hand instruction has been notified (the result of A3503 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3507.

  When the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (the result of A3503 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3504), executes an effect command setting process (A3505), and displays A left hand instruction notification flag indicating that a left hand instruction is notified (displayed) by the device 41 or the like is set (A3506).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (A3507). When the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (the result of A3507 is “Y”), the special figure 1 normal process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of the RWM (A3502). Thus, the special figure 1 routine processing is repeated until the special figure 1 holding number becomes 1 or more.

  When the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 uses the change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as an effect command. Prepare (A3508) and execute the effect command setting process (A3509). Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed (A3510). Thereafter, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3511), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3512).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets information in the special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, in the special figure status area, information on special figure 1 fluctuation or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (A3514), and if it is not a high probability state (when it is a low probability state) (the result of A3514 is “N”), a high probability final variation is in progress. It is determined whether or not (A3515). Whether or not a high-probability final change is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final change flag described later.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is “N”), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A3516), and the special figure 1 fluctuation changing process transition setting process is executed (A3517). ). The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is used in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, when the gaming control device 100 is in a high probability state (result of A3514 is “Y”), or is in a high probability final variation (result of A3515 is “Y”), the special figure 1 variation check flag Is set, the special process 1 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3517).

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 routine process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 routine processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can be changed (A3601). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not capable of starting fluctuation (when the fluctuation start is impossible) (the result of A3601 is “N”), the special figure 2 normal process number “0” is set in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM. Save (A3602). Here, from the end of the big hit change of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (during the special figure 1 display process) to the end of the big hit operation (the special figure 1 big hit end process), the small figure of the special figure 1 variable display game From the end of the hit variation (during the special figure 1 display process) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 1 small hit end process), the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game can be changed (the result of A3601 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (A3602). If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3602 is “N”), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3603), The effect command setting process is executed (A3604). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3605).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets information in the special figure status change in the RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or that the special figure 1 is changing + the special figure 2 is being changed is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (A3607). When the probability is not a high probability state (when it is a low probability state) (the result of A3607 is “N”), a high probability final variation is in progress. It is determined whether or not (A3608). Whether or not a high-probability final change is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final change flag described later.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3608 is “N”), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A3609), and the special figure 2 fluctuation changing process transition setting process is executed (A3610). ). The special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is used in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (result of A3614 is “Y”), or is in a high probability final variation (result of A3615 is “Y”), the special figure 2 variation check flag Is set, the special process 2 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3617).

When the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (the result of A 3602 is “Y”),
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (A3611). If the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3611 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3612). If the special figure 1 is not changing (result of A3612 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3613). If the customer waiting demo has not been started (the result of A3613 is “N”), a customer waiting demo flag is set (A3614).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3615), and executes an effect command setting process (A3616). The presentation control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. Thereafter, the special figure 2 process number “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3617). Thereby, the special figure 2 routine processing is repeated until the special figure 2 holding number becomes 1.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3611 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed. 2 The special figure 2 normal process number “0” is saved in the game process number area (A3617). Also, when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (result of A3612 is “Y”), or when the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3613 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. Without saving, the special figure 2 normal process number “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3617).

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including sorting of prefetched variation patterns). Subsequently, a jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3702) for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, a special chart 1 stop pattern (symbol information) ) Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) related to the setting of) and special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. To do.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3705). ). Subsequently, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting fluctuation start information for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ( A3707) is executed.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3708). When the state is not the high probability state (the result of A3708 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the high probability final variation is being performed (A3709). When the high probability final change is not in progress (the result of A3709 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A3710).

  When the special figure 2 is changing (the result of A3710 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is “Y”), that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is within the time value range of the special figure 2 game processing timer. If YES, the process proceeds to step A3714.

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3711 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more as the predetermined number. Is determined (A3712). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than a predetermined number (here, 4) (the result of A3712 is “N”), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated by a value of (special figure 2 game processing timer area value + number of repetitions × 60000 msec).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3714). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is equal to or longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A3714 is “N”), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is more special. FIG. 2 A command notifying that it is longer than the remaining variation time of the variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3715), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3716). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is equal to or longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a small hit or the like, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display. The production related to the game may end suddenly. For this reason, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, for example, to be non-flashy so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a high probability variation number update process for updating and managing the variation number (remaining number) of the special figure variation display game that starts in the high probability state (A3717), and the special figure 1 variation start process. Exit.

  On the other hand, when it is in a high probability state (result of A3708 is “Y”), when it is in high probability final fluctuation (result of A3709 is “Y”), when special figure 2 is not changing (result of A3710 is “ N "), the process from step A3711 to A3716 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A3717.

  In addition, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (here, 4) (the result of A3712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 also has the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (In this case, 240 (= 4 × 60) or more) is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, so that the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is longer. Without proceeding to step A3717.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 also displays the special figure 1 variable display game even when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3714 is "Y"). The process proceeds to step A3717 without preparing a command notifying that the fluctuation time is longer.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 ordinary process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including sorting of prefetch variation patterns). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3802) for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, the special chart 2 stop symbol (symbol information) ) Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) and special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. To do.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3805). ). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3806) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( A3807), a high probability variation count update process for updating and managing the variation count (remaining count) of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state is executed (A3808), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves deviation information in the RWM small hit flag 1 area (A3901a), and saves deviation information in the RWM big hit flag 1 area (A3902a). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3903a). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether or not the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3905a). When the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3905a is “N”), a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the acquired random number of big hit (A3906a) ), It is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit (A3907a). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907a is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3902a (A3908a), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 can be avoided simultaneously. .

  The game control device 100 obtains when the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3905a is “Y”), or when the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907a is “N”). Based on the big hit random number value, a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit is executed (A3909a), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit ( A3910a). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). When the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is “Y”), the small hit flag 1 area in which the lost information is saved in step A3901a is overwritten and saved (A3911a). The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910a is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 39B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

  In the big hit flag 2 setting process, “small hit flag 1”, “big hit flag 1”, “big hit flag 2”, “big hit flag 2” in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 39A). Is replaced with “big hit flag 1” and “special figure 1” is replaced with “special figure 2”, and the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. Note that steps A3901b to A3911b in the big hit flag 2 setting process correspond to steps A3901a to A3911a in the big hit flag 1 setting process, respectively.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination process (A3906a, A3906b) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, the big hit flag 2 setting process, etc. will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. Note that the jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3103 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a determination result other than a jackpot (A4007), and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A4003). . If the state is a high probability state (the result of A4003 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A4003 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (A4005).

  When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), the determination result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is “N”), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3909a, A3909b) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4101). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the aforementioned big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being a small hit and a big hit. The range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) does not overlap. In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit. However, a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4106), and ends the small hit determination processing. .

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game. (A4102). If information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4102 is "Y"), a small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, when information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4102 is “N”), a small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4104).

  When the gaming control device 100 sets the small hit upper limit determination value, it determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4105 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4105 is “N”), the big hit is set as the determination result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

  FIG. 42 shows a jackpot probability (probability that the determination result is a big hit), a small hit probability (probability that the determination result is a big hit), a loss probability (determination result is out of place) by the aforementioned big hit determination process and the small hit determination process. The probability is shown for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. FIG. 42 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, and FIG. 42 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot probability (probability of jackpot occurrence) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. The small hit probability (occurrence probability per small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. The loss probability (probability of occurrence) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

  In this embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. And the probability of loss is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the loss probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0). Accordingly, the winning at the second starting winning opening 37 is more advantageous to the player than the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (particularly regarding the small hit probability). Is executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, the jackpot symbol is only a probable variation symbol, and after the big hit state (special game state) is finished, it becomes a high probability state (probability variation state) without exception. The rate is 100%. Further, the high probability state continues until a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) of the variable display game is started after the big hit.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether or not the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4301a). When the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4301a is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4302a). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4303a), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area of the RWM (A4304a). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305a), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4307a), and wins the big prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. Open mouth information is acquired and saved in the RWM special figure 1 big prize mouth open information area (A4308a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4301a is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, that is, the small hit flag 1 area contains the small hit information. It is determined whether it is saved (A4309a). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is “Y”), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4310a). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4311a), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4312a). By this processing, the type of specific result is selected. Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4313a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

  When the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4309a is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (A4314a), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4315a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

  The game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern after steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a (A4316a). In addition, the stop symbol pattern includes the outlier symbol of FIG. 5, a plurality of big hit symbols (4R probability variation A2, 8R probability variation A3, 16R probability variation A1, 16R probability variation B1-B3), and small hit symbol (special figure one small hit). It corresponds to either one. With the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the decoration special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A4317a), and executes an effect command setting process (A4318a). The decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and clears the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (A4320a). ), Clear the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (A4321a). Thereafter, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 43A), “small hit flag 1” is set to “small hit flag 2”, “big hit flag 1” is set to “big hit flag 2”, “ Since “Special Figure 1” is replaced with “Special Figure 2”, and the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed, detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that steps A4301b-A4321b in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process respectively correspond to steps A4301a-A4321a in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  Note that the stop symbol pattern set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is the off symbol of FIGS. 6A and 6B, a plurality of big hit symbols (2R probability variation D1, 4R probability variation D3, 8R probability variation E2, 16R probability variation E1, F2, F3) and one of a plurality of small hit symbols (special drawing 2 small hits 1-3). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

  As described above, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and the game ball of the game ball at the second start winning opening 37 is obtained. Based on the detection, a variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). When the state is not a high probability state (when the state is a low probability state) (the result of A4401 is “N”), a variation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern shown in FIG. 1 are acquired (A4403).

  Here, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of reach, and the second half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after reaching the reach state and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., and no reach).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4404). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is “N”). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405).

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A4405 is “Y”), the game control device 100 displays a special figure in the latter half offset data in order to distribute the latter half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 holding number. The value is updated by adding one hold number (A4406), and the special figure 1 hold number is added to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number (A4407). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (out of case) (the result of A4405 is “N”), the process of step A4406 is not performed, and the special figure 1 holding number is added only to the first half offset data. The value is converted (A4407).

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4404 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of steps A4405 to A4407, and the first half offset data and the second half offset acquired in step A4403. The process proceeds to step A4412 without updating or converting the data.

  On the other hand, when the game control apparatus 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A4401 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4408). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4408 is “N”), the first half offset data for the off / small hit of the special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4409), and the process of step A4411 Migrate to When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special figure 1 at a high probability is set (A4410). Subsequently, second-half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A4411). Thereby, in the high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game changes for a long time.

  After step A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control apparatus 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4412), and the second half offset data (variable distribution). Information 2) is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). If the state is a high probability state (result of A4501 is “N”), a variation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation.

  On the other hand, if the game control apparatus 100 is not in a high probability state (in the case of a low probability state) (the result of A4501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A4504). . If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 at the low probability is set (A4505), and the process of step A4507 Migrate to When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4504 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 2 at the low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507). Thereby, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes long-time fluctuation (long fluctuation).

  After step A4503 or A4507, the game control apparatus 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4508), and stores the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). The information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4509), and the special figure 2 information setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a variation group address table (A4601), acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 (A4602), and the variation pattern random number in FIG. A fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from one storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4603).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of date (A4604). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (the result of A4604 is "Y"), a 2-byte distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605), and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place. If it is not (big hit or small hit) (the result of A4604 is “N”), the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606).

  Note that the structure of the latter half variation group table is different from that for hitting, and the random number for sorting is 1 byte size for hitting, and 2 bytes for offset. The winning size is 1 byte for saving data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate per hit of the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low. In the case of winning (in the case of big hit or small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

  After step A4605 or A4606, the game control apparatus 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. 1 (A4608), and a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609). . Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4610). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4611), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4612). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. 1 (A4614), and a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4616), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. Through the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Setting Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the latter half variation selection address table (A4701), and acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 (A4702). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of FIG. 2 (A4703), and a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4705). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4706), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4708). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the storage area of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 in FIG. 2 (A4709), and a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4711), and ends the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. Through the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4605) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of 2-byte sorting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether or not the top data of the latter-half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code with no distribution (ie, “0”) (A4801). It is determined whether the code is not assigned (A4802).

  Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  When the first data in the second half variation group table is a code without distribution (the result of A4802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the data address corresponding to the distribution result (A4807). ) The 2-byte sorting process ends.

  On the other hand, when the first data of the second half variation group table is not a code without distribution (the result of A4802 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the first distribution value specified in the second half variation group table. Is acquired (A4803).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value obtained in the process of step A4803 from the random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. A new random value is calculated (A4804). Further, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4805).

  If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4805 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4806), and then performs the processing after step A4803. Execute. That is, the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired (A4803), the random value determined in the process of step A4805 is subtracted as a new random value, and the new random value is further subtracted. Is calculated (A4804). Then, with respect to the calculated new random value, each process is executed until it is determined in step A4805 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4805 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table.

  When the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4805 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (A4807), 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. The sorting process selects the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, or selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. It is.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the first data of the prepared second-half variation group table (selection table), second-half variation selection table (selection table), and first-half variation selection table (selection table) as a non-sorted code (ie, “ 0 ”) (A4901), and it is determined whether or not the code is not assigned (A4902).

  Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  Then, when the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (the result of A4902 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the distribution result is The address of the corresponding data is updated (A4907), and the distribution process ends.

  On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is not a code with no distribution (the result of A4902 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the latter half variation group table, One sort value specified first in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4903).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates a new random value by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A4903 from the loaded random value (value of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) (A4904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4905).

  When the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (result of A4905 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4906), and performs the processing after step A4903. Run. That is, the distribution values specified next in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are acquired (A4903), and the distribution value is determined by using the random number determined in step A4905 as a new random value. Subtraction is performed and a new random value is calculated (A4904). The process is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4905 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table.

  When the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4905 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (A4907), and performs the distribution process. Exit.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 change start process and the special figure 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5001). When information is being set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A5001 is “Y”), the random number storage area (for the holding ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the used special figure 1 is cleared (A5002). ). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5001 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game. The storage area is cleared (A5003).

  After steps A5002 and A5003, the game control apparatus 100 sets a first-half variation time value table (A5004), and acquires a first-half variation time value corresponding to the first-half variation number (A5005). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5007).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A5008), and saves the addition value in the target special game processing timer area (A5009). Subsequently, it is determined whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5010). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5010 is "N"), since information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the long fluctuation (long time fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game It is determined whether or not to start (A5011).

  When the game control apparatus 100 does not start the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A5011 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves 0 in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5012). When the long variation of the two-variable display game is started (result of A5011 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013). In the special fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, a fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not sufficient by the 2-byte timer is changed. Therefore, a predetermined number of repetitions (9 in this case) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

  For example, when a timer of 60000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions of nine times is saved, timer interruption processing (particularly, special figure 2) In the game process (FIG. 33), the timer is subtracted (A3303), and when the time is up (the result of A3304 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3306), A value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set. As a result, it is possible to make the long fluctuation special figure 2 fluctuation display game have a long fluctuation time of 60000 msec + (60000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

  Note that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (the number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009. It is an addition value of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

  When the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5010 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5014 without setting the number of times the timer is repeated.

  After steps A5010, A5012, and A5013, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a change command (MODE) corresponding to the first half change number (A5014), and prepares a change command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half change number (A5015). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as an effect command is executed (A5016).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5017). When information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "Y"), the special figure 1 holding number is updated by -1 (A5018), and the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 variable display game Are shifted (A5019), and the free area after the shift is cleared (A5020). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the contents of the random number storage area are not shifted (see FIG. 1). Since the number of holds is 1), the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Variation commands including information on patterns are listed, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation number update process (A3717, A3808) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of high probability variation number update processing. In the high probability variation number update process, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state (here, the high probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). When the state is not a high probability state (when the state is a low probability state) (the result of A5101 is “N”), the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, it becomes a low probability state (can be set to a low probability state by a fanfare / interval process transition setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game but also the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed in a low probability state. Not only the FIG. 2 variable display game but also the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in a low probability state. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are in a high probability state. Sometimes executed.

  When the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A5101 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 updates the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game starting in the high probability state by −1 (1). (A5102). The initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 (described later, special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process) ). Moreover, even if any of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, the high probability fluctuation frequency is updated by -1.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A5103). When the high probability variation number is not 0 (the result of A5103 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (result of A5103 is “Y”), a signal related to the end of high probability (off data of 2 jackpots) is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5104). Further, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5105). Signals related to the end of high probability & short time are, for example, off data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variation This is the off data of the time shortening state signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area of the RWM (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM ( A5107), a high-probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) to start variation is set (A5108), and the high-probability variation number update process is terminated.

  The high probability final variation flag is information for indicating that the variation started during the high probability even when the probability is low. In the case of high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation), if the probability is not lowered to a low probability immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the winning determination based on the start opening prize during the final fluctuation is performed with high probability. Therefore, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag at the start of the change of the high probability final change. Therefore, a high probability final variation flag is set and used to determine whether or not it is a high probability final variation (for example, in steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). In addition, the high probability final variation flag includes information that can determine which of the high probability final variation in FIG.

  As described above, after the big hit, the high probability state is maintained until a predetermined number of times (the initial value of the high probability variation number, for example, 50 times) of the variation display game is started, and the high probability variation number = 0 and the predetermined number of times. When the eye variation display game (high probability final variation) is started, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is set, the low probability state is reached and the short time state ends, and the high probability final variation flag Is set.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (A3517) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets “1” as the process number to shift to the special figure 1 changing process (A5201a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5202a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A5203a), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in Special Figure 1 (on data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204a).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 changing control flag area (A5205a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 indicator 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (A5206a), and the special figure 1 changing symbol number area The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting symbol in FIG. 5) is saved (A5207a), and the special symbol 1 changing processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 ordinary process will be described. FIG. 52B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process.

  The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is obtained by replacing "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) with "special figure 2" (special symbol 2) in the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (Fig. 52A). Since the same process as the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed, detailed description thereof is omitted. Note that steps A5201b to A5207b in the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process correspond to steps A5201a to A5207a in the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, respectively.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process.

  The game control device 100 first updates the symbol determination number of times output by +1 (A5301). The symbol determination frequency output count is used in a symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special figure 1 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5303). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation (high probability final variation) (A5306). If the high probability final variation flag is set in step A5108 of the high probability variation number update process, it can be determined that the high probability final variation is present. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started has a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5306 is “Y”), the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is displayed as the stop symbol display time (stop display time) of special figure 1. The corresponding display time is set (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the off symbol of Special Fig. 1, 2000 msec if it is the big hit symbol of Special Fig. 1, and 136 msec if it is the small symbol symbol of Special Fig. 1. is there.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is not the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5306 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation as the display time of the special figure 1. (A5308). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final variation is 7000 msec.

  After steps A5307 and A5308, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (the stop symbol number at the time of loss) is the special figure 1 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save to the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of big hit or small hit) (the result of A5309 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable display game is also It is determined whether or not (A5310). If Special Figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5310 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5320. If the special figure 2 is also changing (the result of A5310 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 display process described later is being executed (A5311).

  When the special figure 2 display process is being executed (the result of A5311 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A5313. When the special figure 2 display process is not being executed (the result of A5311 is “N”), the symbol determination count output count is updated by one (A5312). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 1 (display time of special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set as the display time of special figure 2 (A5313) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3303), and is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol in FIG. 1 and the display time of the stop symbol in FIG. 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (basically, the display time is extended, but it may be shortened depending on the case).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the off symbol command of the decoration special figure 2 as an effect command (A5315), and executes an effect command setting process (A5316). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5318). After that, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for setting for executing the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5319).

  Through the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, in the special-figure 1 fluctuating process, which is the control related to the special-figure 1 fluctuation display game, the result of losing the special-figure 2 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation-display game) is set. The execution of the special figure 2 display process (end of the special figure 2 variable display game) is set. Thus, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (during the fluctuation of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is Is forcibly terminated (forced termination) by the result of the loss.

  The special figure 1 changing process is performed when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) times out (A3204). Since the result is executed at “Y”), when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the hit result stops fluctuation, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly ended (forced termination).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 1 command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saves it in the winning symbol command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A5321). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process described above (the stop symbol number at the time of the small hit) is the special figure 1. Load from the stop symbol save area and save to the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (a big win) (the result of A5321 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area. Load the value information, save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5322),
The special prize opening information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening information area and saved in the special winning opening information area (A5323). Thereafter, the information saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 for setting for executing the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5325), and the special figure 1 changing process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during the fluctuation of the special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit result, the special control 2 variable display game is dismissed. Forced termination means to forcibly terminate with the result.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the symbol determination number output count by +1 (A5401). The symbol determination frequency output count is used in a symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5403). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation (high probability final variation) (A5406). If the high probability final variation flag is set in step A5108 of the high probability variation number update process, it can be determined that the high probability final variation is present. When the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5406 is “N”), the stop symbol display time of special figure 2 (stop display time) corresponds to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 The display time to be set is set (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol of Special Fig. 2, 600 msec if the big symbol of Special Fig. 2, and 600 msec if the small symbol of Special Fig. 2 is. is there. In addition, the display time of the off symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol in the special figure 2 is the same.

  The game control device 100 sets the display time at the time of the high probability final change as the display time of the special figure 2 when the special figure 2 change display game to be started is the high probability final change (result of A5406 is “Y”). (A5408). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final variation is 7000 msec.

  After steps A5407 and A5408, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (A5409). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (the result of A5409 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is displayed as the special figure 2 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save to the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of place (the result of A5410 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed). Is determined (A5410). When Special Figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5410 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5420. If the special figure 1 is also changing (the result of A5410 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 display process described later is being executed (A5411).

  When the special figure 1 display process is being executed (the result of A5411 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A5413. When the special figure 1 display process is not being executed (the result of A5411 is "N"), the symbol determination count output count is updated by 1 (A5412). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 (display time of special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set as the display time of special figure 1 (A5413) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game process timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period) in the next special figure 1 game process (A3203), and is added extra. Thereby, the display time of the stop symbol of the actual special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of special figure 1 has already been started, the display time is reset here (basically, the display time is extended, but it may be shortened depending on circumstances).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the off symbol command of the decoration special figure 1 as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5418). Thereafter, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting for executing the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5419).

  Through the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, in the special-figure 2 fluctuating process, which is the control related to the special-figure 2 fluctuation display game, the result of losing the special-figure 1 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation-display game) is set. The execution of the special figure 1 display processing (end of the special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the special figure 1 fluctuation), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variable display game is Will forcibly end the change (end of execution) with the result of the loss.

  The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the fluctuation time, that is, when the special figure 2 game process timer is repeated 0 and the special figure 2 game process timer expires (results of A3304 and A3305). Is executed at “Y”), when the special figure 2 variable display game of the winning result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended (execution ended).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads the decoration special figure 2 command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saves it in the winning symbol command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5421). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (the stop symbol number at the time of the small hit) is the special figure 2 Load from the stop symbol saving area and save to the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (a big win) (the result of A5421 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area. Load the value information, save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5422),
The special prize opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 big winning opening information area and saved in the special winning opening information area (A5423). Thereafter, the information saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 for setting for executing the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5425), and the special figure 2 changing process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during the fluctuation of the special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result, the special control 1 variable display game is disconnected. Forced termination means to forcibly terminate with the result.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5325) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display mid-process transition setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “2” as the process number to shift to the special figure 1 display process (A5501a), saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5502a), and 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable control flag as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51. The area is saved (A5504a), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5425) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “2” as the process number to shift to the special figure 2 display process (A5501b), saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5502b), and 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52. The area is saved (A5504b), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (A5419) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display mid-process transition setting process 2. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated by hitting the special figure 2 variable display game.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “2” as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 display process (A5601a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5602a). A signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A5604a). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (A5606a), and displays the special figure 1 big opening opening information area. Is cleared (A5607a). Further, shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Subsequently, the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area is cleared (A5610a), and the shift symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (A5611a). With the above processing, the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 becomes the fluctuation stop (fluctuation end) with the outage stop symbol.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 56B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 2. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated by hitting the special figure 1 variable display game.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “2” as the process number to shift to the special figure 2 display processing (A5601b), saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5602b), and A signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A5604b). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (A5606b), and displays the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area. Is cleared (A5607b). Further, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Subsequently, the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area is cleared (A5610b), and the shift stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of disconnection) is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5611b). With the above processing, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the stoppage of fluctuation (end of fluctuation) with the outlier stop symbol.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 display process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. 57A and 57B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display process. 57A shows the first half of the special figure 1 display process, and FIG. 57B shows the second half of the special figure 1 display process.

  First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag 1 (indicating the small hit information or outlier information) from the small hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the small hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 (indicating jackpot information or outlier information) is loaded from the jackpot flag 1 area (A5703), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (A5704). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5705).

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5706). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 1 signal. Subsequently, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit table (A5709), and sets the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table. Acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A5710). The round number upper limit is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5711).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes an effect command setting process (A5713). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5714), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5715).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, 2 jackpot signals are turned on at a jackpot other than 2R, turned on at 2R jackpot at high probability, turned off at 2R jackpot at low probability, and 3 signals at jackpot are turned on at jackpot other than 2R. Turns off at 2R big hit, and turns on at 2R big hit at low probability.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information (A5717), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top large winning opening that opens the top large winning opening based on the large winning opening opening information (A5719).

  When the game control device 100 is a big hit of opening the top prize winning opening (the result of A5719 is “Y”), the gaming prize winning device illegal clearing number area is cleared (A5720), and the RWM top winning prize fraud monitoring period is reached. The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the flag area (A5721), and “3” is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval process (A5724). If the upper prize winning opening is not a big hit (the result of A5719 is “N”), the lower prize winning counter illegal prize number area is cleared (A5722), and the RWM's lower big prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area is outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5723), and “3” is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval process (A5724).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5725), executes the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (A5726), and ends the special figure 1 display process. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5705 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 1. Or not (whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit) is determined (A5727). When the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5728). When the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high probability final variation (the result of A5728 is “Y”), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5729), and an effect command setting process is executed. (A5730).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5731), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5732). The transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery saves a command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. Thereafter, the winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5734). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, when the current special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5728 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of steps A5729 to A5732, and hits the winning symbol from the winning symbol command area. The command is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5734).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5735), and executes an effect command setting process (A5736). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A5737). When not in a high probability state (result of A5737 is “N”), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5738) In order to turn off the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area of the RWM (A5739). In the case of a high probability state (result of A5737 is “Y”), a signal related to the right handing instruction (ON data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5740), and it is right handing To turn on the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5741).

  After steps A5739 and A5741, the game control device 100 clears the lower prize winning portion fraud winning number area (A5742), saves the fraud monitoring period flag outside the lower big prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A5743), The special figure 1 small hit fanfare process transition setting process is executed (A5744), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is “N”), that is, the special figure 1 variable display game. If the result of the above is out of step, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (A5745). If it is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5745 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5753.

  When the game control apparatus 100 has a high probability final variation (the result of A5745 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5746), and executes an effect command setting process (A5747). . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5748), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5749). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5750). If the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (the result of A5750 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5753.

  When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A5750 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5751). Subsequently, in order to extinguish the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that it is right-handed, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5752). Then, the special figure status area in the special figure 1 fluctuation is cleared (information subtraction) (A5753). Thereafter, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place, the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5754), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. In the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1, in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, "0" is set as the process number, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 58A and 58B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special figure 2 display processing. 58A shows the first half of the special figure 2 display processing, and FIG. 58B shows the second half of the special figure 2 display processing.

  First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating the small hit information or disappointment information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801), and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 (indicating big hit information or outlier information) is loaded from the big hit flag 2 area (A5803), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, based on the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5805).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the on data of the condition device operating signal, the on data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the on data of the special symbol 2 per signal. Subsequently, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared as an effect command (A5807), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5808).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the round number upper limit table (A5809), and sets the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table. Acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A5810). The round number upper limit is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5811).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes an effect command setting process (A5813). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5814), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5815).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, 2 jackpot signals are turned on at a jackpot other than 2R, turned on at 2R jackpot at high probability, turned off at 2R jackpot at low probability, and 3 signals at jackpot are turned on at jackpot other than 2R. Turns off at 2R big hit, and turns on at 2R big hit at low probability.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information (A5817), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5818). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top large winning opening that opens the top large winning opening based on the large winning opening opening information (A5819).

  When the game control device 100 is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (the result of A5819 is “Y”), the gaming prize winning device illegal clearing number area is cleared (A5820), and the RWM top winning prize fraud monitoring period is reached. The fraud monitoring out-of-period monitoring flag is saved in the flag area (A5821), and “3” is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5824). If the upper prize winning opening is not a big hit (the result of A5819 is “N”), the lower prize winning counter illegal prize number area is cleared (A5822), and the RWM's lower big prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area is outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5823), and “3” is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval process (A5824).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5825), executes the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (A5826), and ends the special figure 2 display process. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. Or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) is determined (A5827). When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5828). When the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high probability final variation (the result of A5828 is “Y”), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5829), and an effect command setting process is executed. (A5830).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5831), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5832). Thereafter, a winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5834). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, if the current special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5828 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of steps A5829 to A5832 and issues a command from the winning symbol command area. The winning symbol is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5834).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes an effect command setting process (A5836). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A5837). If not in the high probability state (result of A5837 is “N”), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838) In order to turn off the second gaming state display section 56 (lamps D8 to D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5839). In the case of a high probability state (result of A5837 is “Y”), a signal related to the right-handed instruction (ON data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5840), and it is right-handed In order to turn on the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for informing the player, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5841).

  After steps A5839 and A5841, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the game is a small hit for opening the top prize winning opening (A5842). When it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (the result of A5842 is “Y”), the upper prize winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (A5843), and the fraud monitoring period is displayed in the upper winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area. The outside flag is saved (A5844), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 display mid-process is terminated. If it is not a small hit to open the upper big prize opening (the result of A5842 is “N”), that is, if it is a small hit to open the lower big prize opening, the lower big winning prize area illegal winning number area is cleared (A5845). Then, the fraud monitoring non-framing period flag is saved in the lower big prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A5846), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. If the result of the above is out of step, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5848). If it is not the high probability final variation (the result of A5848 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5856.

  When the game control apparatus 100 has a high probability final variation (the result of A5848 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849), and executes an effect command setting process (A5850). . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5851), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5852). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5853). If the special figure 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (the result of A5853 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5856.

  When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5853 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5854). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second game state display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that the player is right-handed, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5855). Clearing the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5856). Thereafter, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. In the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1, in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal process, "0" is set as the process number, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 display process and the special figure 2 display process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start of the big hit (on data of one signal of the big hit) in the external information output data area (A5901), and saves a signal related to the end of the high probability & short time in the test signal output data area. (A5902), and the round number area for managing the number of rounds in the RWM is cleared (A5903).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5904), and saves the special figure low probability & no short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5905). By setting the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag, the hit probability becomes low, and there is no time reduction (no time reduction state). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5906), and the number of high probability fluctuations in the RWM is maintained. The probability variation frequency area is cleared (A5907).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the big hit information in the special figure status area (A5908), and clears the high probability final fluctuation flag area holding the high probability final fluctuation flag in the RWM (A5909). Subsequently, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (ON data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5910), and the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamp D8) for notifying that it is right-handed. -In order to light D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5911).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A5912), and displays the special figure 2 abnormal number area holding the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number in the RWM. Clears 0 (A5913), clears the special figure 1 fluctuation count area that holds the special figure 1 fluctuation number in the RWM (A5914), and holds the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer value in the RWM The change notification timer area is cleared to 0 (A5915), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A5744) in the special figure 1 display process will be described. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “7” as the process number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare process (A6001a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and a signal related to the start of the small hit (on-data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit (on-data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and is hitting the special figure status area. Information is saved (A6006a). Further, the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (A5847) in the special figure 2 display mid-process will be described. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

  Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process is the same as "Special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in "Special figure 1" (special symbol 2) (special symbol 2). Since the same process as the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process respectively correspond to steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3211, A3314) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the number of rounds in the number of rounds area by +1 (A6101). Since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (A5903), the number of rounds is 0 before the start of the current big hit operation. After that, a round command corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6102), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6103).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the big hit midway processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds (A6104), and saves it in the big hit middle processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6105). Here, in the case of a pattern that repeatedly opens and closes the big winning opening during one round, 0 is set as the initial value, and in the case of a pattern that opens the big winning opening only once during one round, the upper limit is suddenly set as the initial value. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern that repeats opening and closing, even if the initial value is not 0, it may be a value greater than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is, start from an intermediate value). It is also possible to use a pattern that repeats opening and closing for one of the upper prize opening and the lower prize winning opening, and a pattern that opens only once for the other. Both the upper and lower prize winning openings can be opened and closed. It is good also as a pattern which repeats or the pattern opened only once.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds (A6106). Subsequently, “4” is set as the process number in order to shift to the special winning opening opening process (A6107), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6108). When the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A6108 is “Y”), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), and the special winning opening opening time is shown in the special figure 1 game processing. Save to the timer area (A6110). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6108 is “N”), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), and the special winning opening opening time is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6112).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening based on the winning prize opening information (A6113). When it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening (the result of A6113 is “Y”), the process for setting the winning prize opening opening process transition processing 1 is executed (A6114), and the process during the fanfare / interval is ended. If it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (the result of A6113 is “N”), that is, if it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening, the process transition setting process 2 during the big prize opening is executed (A6115) The fanfare / interval processing is terminated. In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots that open only the upper prize winning opening and the jackpot that opens only the lower winning prize opening. However, a jackpot that opens both the upper winning prize opening and the lower winning prize opening is provided. Configuration is also possible.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process for setting the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process 1 (A6114) will be described. FIG. 62A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening.

  The game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of opening of the top prize winning opening (ON data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and stores it in the RWM big winning opening solenoid output data area. Then, the upper prize winning opening on data for turning on the upper prize winning solenoid 39b is saved (A6202a), the number of the big winning prize count is cleared (A6203a), and the process for setting the process for setting the special prize opening open process 1 is completed.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the process for setting a process for setting a special prize opening during the fanfare / interval process 2 (A6115) will be described. FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during the big prize opening opening.

  The game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the lower prize winning opening (on-data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6201b), and saves it in the RWM big prize opening solenoid output data area. The lower big prize opening on data for turning on the lower big prize opening solenoid 38b is saved (A6202b), the big prize opening count number is cleared (A6203b), and the big prize opening open process transition setting process 1 is finished.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (A3212, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process.

  First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the big hit processing control pointer (A6301), and determines whether or not the loaded big hit processing control pointer value is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (for example, 21). (A6302). When the value of the big hit processing control pointer is less than the big hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is “N”), the big hit middle processing control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the big hit is performed in accordance with the big hit middle processing control pointer. The action transition setting process is executed (A6304), and the process for opening the special winning opening is completed.

  When the value of the big hit processing control pointer is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current round is the final round (A6305). If the round number (A6101) updated by +1 in the fanfare / interval processing is the final round number (for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R), it can be determined that it is the final round.

  When it is not the final round (the result of A6305 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306), and executes an effect command setting process (A6308). If it is the final round (result of A6305 is “Y”), an ending command is prepared as an effect command (A6307), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6308).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the big winning opening release information (A6309), and sets “5” as the processing number to shift to the big winning opening residual ball processing (A6310). ). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6311). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6311 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6312), and the remaining ball processing time is set in the special figure 1 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6313). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6311 is “N”), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6314), and the remaining ball processing time is shown in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (A6315).

  After steps A6313 and A6315, the game control apparatus 100 saves off data in the big prize opening solenoid output data area in order to turn off both the lower big prize opening solenoid 38b and the upper big prize opening solenoid 39b (A6316), The process during opening of the big prize opening ends.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit operation transition setting process (A6304) in the special winning opening open process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit operation transition setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 performs a branch using the big hit mid-process control pointer (A6401). It is also possible to use the value before the +1 update in step A6303 as the big hit processing control pointer instead of the current value. If the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an even number, a wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the big hit processing control pointer is set (A6402), and off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A6403).

  When the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 sets the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big hit mid-process control pointer (A6404). For example, the big winning opening opening time is 200 msec when the big hit middle processing control pointer is 1 to 19 (big hit middle processing control pointer = 1-19), and the big hit middle processing control pointer is 21 (big hit middle processing control pointer = 21). In this case, it is 25000 msec. The 200 msec special winning opening time is used in the case of a pattern that repeatedly opens and closes the special winning opening within a round. Subsequently, upper prize winning opening on data for turning on the upper prize winning solenoid 39b is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (A6405). As a result, the upper prize winning opening can be repeatedly opened and closed for a short time. Here, when the lower prize winning opening repeatedly opens and closes for a short time, the lower prize winning opening on-data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area, or the lower prize winning opening on data and the upper prize winning opening are on. A configuration for saving both data is also possible.

  After steps A6403 and A6405, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6406). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6406 is “Y”), the set time (wait time or big prize opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of A6406 is “N”), that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408). ).

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball process (A3213, A3316) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning prize remaining ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (result of A6501 is “N”), a test signal is output for signals related to the end of the special winning opening (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and special electric accessory 2 operating signal) Save in the data area (A6502), set the winning opening opening information and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (A6503), and set “3” as the processing number to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A6504) ). As a result, the fanfare / interval processing, the special winning opening open processing, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing are repeated until the final round. The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round until the winning ball remaining ball processing time and the interval time elapse.

  When the game control device 100 is in the final round (the result of A6501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process transition setting process for shifting to the jackpot end process (A6505), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern Is set (A6506), and “6” is set as the process number (A6507). Thereby, it is possible to shift to the big hit end processing. The length of the ending period is the sum of the ending time and the winning ball remaining ball processing time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period.

  After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6508). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6508 is “Y”), the set processing number (“3” or “6”) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6509) and set. The saved time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated.

  When the game control device 100 is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6508 is “N”), that is, when it is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the processing number (“3” or “6”). ) Is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6511), and the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6512), and the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated. .

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (A6505) in the winning prize remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end process transition setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the end of the special winning opening (off data of the special electric player 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric player 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area ( A6601), clears the big prize count area that holds the big prize count in the RWM (A6602), and clears the round area (A6603). Subsequently, the round number upper limit value area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit value information area is cleared (A6605), the big winning opening release information area is cleared (A6606), and the big hit middle processing control pointer area is cleared. (A6607).

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal process (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6702). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 1 signal for the big hit and the off data of 3 signals for the big hit) is saved in the external information output data area (A6703), and a signal related to the start of the high probability & short time (output from the big hit) Are continuously output in the external information output data area (A6704).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6705). The signal related to the end of the jackpot is, for example, off data of the condition device operating signal, off data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, or off data of the special symbol per signal. Subsequently, a signal relating to the start of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & short time are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal. . Thereafter, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (A6708), saves the right-handed number in the game state display number 2 area (A6709), and the round LED pointer. The number of extinguishing is saved in the area (A6710). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6712), and the special figure status is displayed. Clear the area (A6713)

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special-purpose game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the big hit state is finished (A6714). In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a probabilistic variable symbol, and after the jackpot is over, the state becomes a high probability state and also a time-short state. Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6715). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6716).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 big hit end processing. This special figure 2 game wait time value is used to delay the fluctuation start determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during the special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12). Is set to Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the interrupt period (that is, 2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

  If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1310 in FIG. 12) that is executed immediately after the special figure 1 big hit end process is executed (A1310 in FIG. 12). In FIG. 12A1311), the start of change of the special figure 2 variable display game starts (starts within the current timer interrupt process), so the special figure 2 variable display game is changed from the special figure 1 variable display game. It may be a problem because it starts first. In the special figure 1 big hit end process, the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set, so it remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed in the next timer interruption process (the special figure 1 normal process during the special figure 1 game process).

  The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) that is twice the interrupt period, but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process). This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special timer 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special timer 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to become 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”), and the special FIG. 2 variable display game Is determined (a special figure 2 normal process during the special figure 2 game process). Thereby, in the next timer interruption process after the big hit state end by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 game process and the special figure). If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start to fluctuate simultaneously. As described above, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stopped at a symbol that is off (forcibly ended or originally has not changed).

  If there is no problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started before the special figure 1 variable display game after the big hit state, the process of step A6717 is omitted. 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number to return to the special figure 2 normal process (A6801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6802). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 1 signal of the big hit and the off data of 3 signals of the big hit) is saved in the external information output data area (A6803), and a signal related to the start of the high probability & short time (output from the big hit) Are continuously output in the external information output data area (A6804).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6805). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot is, for example, off data of the condition device operating signal, off data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, or off data of the special symbol 2 per signal. Subsequently, a signal relating to the start of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & short time are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal. . Thereafter, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number with a high probability in the game state display number area (A6808), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6809), and the round LED pointer. The extinguishing number is saved in the area (A6810). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812), and the special figure status is displayed. Clear the area (A6813)

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the high probability flag in the special-purpose game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the big hit state is finished (A6814). In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a probabilistic variable symbol, and after the jackpot is over, the state becomes a high probability state and also a time-short state. Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6816).

  In the special figure 2 big hit end process, it is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt process, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game starts. Is determined (within the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process), and if the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change simultaneously. Because it can be done.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare processing (A3215, A3318) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of small hitting fanfare processing.

  First, the game control device 100 performs branching according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening by the small hit (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A6901). The opening pattern of the big winning opening by the small hit corresponds to the stop symbol number (A4312a, A4312b) or the small hit symbol (stop pattern pattern of A4313a, A4313b).

  When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 prepares the small hitting opening command for opening the lower big prize opening as an effect command (A6902), and executes the effect command setting process (A6902). A6903). Next, "8" is set as the process number (A6904), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6905), and the small winning opening time 1 (for example, 48 msec) is set as the opening time of the big prize opening. To save the special process 1 game processing timer area (A6906). Subsequently, a signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (the special electric accessory 2 operating signal ON data) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6907), and the lower prize winning opening on data is stored in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6908).

  When the opening pattern by the small hit is 1 in the special figure 2 small hits, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening releasing command for opening the lower big prize opening as an effect command (A6909), and executes an effect command setting process. (A6910). Next, “8” is set as the process number (A6911), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6912), and the small hit opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the big prize opening. Special figure 2 It saves in the game processing timer area (A6913). Subsequently, a signal relating to the start of the small hitting operation (the ON data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6914), and the lower prize opening on-data in the big prize opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6915).

  When the opening pattern by the small hit is 2 in the special figure 2 small hits, the game control device 100 prepares a command for opening the small hit of the upper prize winning opening as an effect command (A6916), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6917). Next, “8” is set as the processing number (A6918), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6919), and the small hit opening time 3 (eg, 1200 msec) is set as the opening time of the big prize opening. Special figure 2 Saves in the game processing timer area (A6920). Subsequently, a signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (the ON data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6921), and the upper prize winning opening on data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6922).

  When the opening pattern by the small hit is 3 in the special figure 2 small hits, the game control device 100 prepares the small hit opening releasing command for opening the upper prize winning opening as an effect command (A6923), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6924). Next, “8” is set as the processing number (A6925), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6926), and the small winning opening time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the big prize opening. Special figure 2 Saves in the game processing timer area (A6927). Subsequently, a signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (ON data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6928), and the upper prize winning port on data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6929).

  After step A6908, A6915, A6922, or A6929, the game control device 100 clears the big prize count area (A6930) and ends the small hit fanfare processing.

  As described above, each small hit stop symbol number or the type of small hit release pattern corresponding to the small hit symbol (Special Figure 1 Small Hit, Special Figure 2 Small Per 1, 2, 3) The winning opening (one of the upper winning opening or the lower winning opening), the opening time of the winning opening (small opening time), and the like are determined. In this embodiment, the control pointer is not set, and only the small hit opening pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once. However, as in the case of the big winning, the control pointer is set to open / close the big winning opening. There may be a repeating small hit opening pattern. In addition, by setting “8” as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit middle processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the middle hit process (A3216, A3319) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hitting process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit end screen command as an effect command (A7001), and executes an effect command setting process (A7002). Thereby, the effect control device 300 that has received the small hit end screen command can display the small hit end screen on the display device 41.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 performs branching according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening by the small hit (Special Figure 1 small hit, Special Figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A7003).

  The game control device 100 sets “9” as the process number when the release pattern by the small hit is special figure 1 small hit (A7004), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7005). The small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize winning solenoid 38b and the upper prize winning solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the large winning prize solenoid output data area (A7007), and the small hit / medium processing is terminated.

  The game control device 100 sets “9” as the process number when the opening pattern by the small hit is 1 per special figure 2 small area (A7008), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7009). ), The small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize winning solenoid 38b and the upper prize winning solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (A7011), and the small hit / medium processing is terminated.

  The game control device 100 sets “9” as the processing number when the opening pattern by the small hit is special figure 2 small hit 2 or special figure 2 small hit 3 (A7012), in the special figure 2 game processing number area. The processing number is saved (A7013), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize winning solenoid 38b and the upper prize winning solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the large winning prize solenoid output data area (A7015), and the small hitting / medium processing is terminated.

  By setting “9” as the process number, it is possible to move to the small hit remaining ball process after the small hit middle process is completed.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A3217, A3320) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit remaining sphere process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A7101). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is "Y"), "10" is set as the process number (A7102), and this process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area ( A7103), the small hitting ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

  The game control device 100 sets “10” as the process number when the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A7101 is “N”), that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7106), and the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (A7107).

  After steps A7104 and A7107, the game control apparatus 100 outputs test signal output data regarding the end of the small hitting operation (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and off signal of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal). Save to the area (A7108), clear the winning prize count area (A7109), and end the small hit remaining ball processing. By setting “10” as the process number, after the small hit remaining ball process is completed, the process can be shifted to the small hit end process.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal process (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7202). Subsequently, a signal related to the end of the small hit (off signal of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7203), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7204). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7206).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A7207). When it is in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “Y”), the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). When not in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “N”), the signal related to the left hand instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and the game state display number 2 area The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

  Here, for the same reason as Step A6717 in the special figure 1 big hit end process (FIG. 67), 8 msec (2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt period, As a special figure 2 game wait time value, it is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Thereby, in the next timer interruption process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 game process and the special figure). If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start to fluctuate simultaneously.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number in order to return to the special figure 2 normal process (A7301), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7302). Subsequently, a signal related to the end of the small hit (off signal of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (A7305). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7307).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A7308). When it is in a high probability state (result of A7308 is “Y”), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. When not in the high probability state (result of A7308 is “N”), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7309), and the game state display number 2 area The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7310), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated.

  For the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 68), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (A3220, A3323) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol variation control process. The symbol fluctuation control process is a process for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

  In the game control device 100, first, of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the special figure fluctuation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1) is a changing flag (a flag indicating that the change is in progress). Is checked (A7401). If it is changing, the changing flag is saved in the change control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

  Then, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is a changing flag (A7402). If the special figure fluctuation control flag is a changing flag (A7402). The result is “Y”), and the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7403). The address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Further, of the special figures 1 and 2, the blinking control timer related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1) is updated by -1 (A7404), and the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up. It is determined whether or not (A7405).

  When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (the result of A7405 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target changing symbol number area (A7408). If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (the result of A7405 is “Y”), the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (A7406). Furthermore, among special figure 1 and special figure 2, the changing symbol number relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is updated by +1 and saved in the target changing symbol number area (A7407). Display data corresponding to the value of the changing symbol number area is acquired (A7408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6A, the variable display game that repeats the non-lighting symbol (fluctuating symbol number = 0) and the lighting symbol (fluctuating symbol number = 1) is a special symbol display to be controlled. (Special figure 1 display 51 or Special figure 2 display 52). The initial value of the changing symbol number is set to 0 indicating the non-lighting symbol in FIG. 5 (A5207a, A5207b), for example.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not the changing flag (the result of A7402 is “N”), the game control device 100 displays a symbol display table (for example, special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled ( (For stop) is acquired (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, display data corresponding to the value (stop symbol number) of the target stop symbol area is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6A, the special figure display (the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display) to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. The special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number will be displayed on the device 52). In the stop symbol area, stop symbol numbers are saved in correspondence with big hits, small hits, or loss (A5324, A5424).

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of segment LED editing processing. In the segment LED editing process, a round display unit 53, a special figure 1 hold display (storage display unit) 54, a first game state display unit 55, a second game state display unit 56, etc. provided in the collective display device 50 are configured. Setting related to driving of segment LED to be performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a special figure 1 reservation number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is defined (A7501), and acquires display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. Save to the segment area of the special figure 1 hold indicator (A7502).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 53 is defined (A7503), acquires display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, and stores it in the segment area of the round display unit 53. Save (A7504).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 55 is defined (A7505). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number in the game state display number area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 55 (A7506). Thereby, in the 1st game state display part 55, a high probability state or a low probability state can be displayed.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 56 is defined (A7507). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 in the game state display number 2 area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display unit 56 (A7508), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. Thereby, in the 2nd game state display part 56, it can display that it is at the time of right strike or left strike.

  In addition, when providing the 3rd game state display part 57 which shows that the variable display game is interrupted corresponding to the below-mentioned modification, the game control apparatus 100 displays on the 3rd game state display part 57. A game state display table in which a mode is defined is set, and display data corresponding to whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is obtained to obtain a third game state display unit 57. You may save in the segment area.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61), that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A7601).

  When the magnet sensor is on (result of A7601 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 100 sets a magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. It is updated (A7602), and it is determined whether or not the timer has expired (A7603).

  The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (the result of A7603 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A7604), the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A7605).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command as a production command (A7606), and prepares a magnet fraud occurrence flag indicating that a magnet fraud has occurred as a magnet fraud flag (A7606). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interruptions) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (the result of A7601 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected. (A7608). If the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A7609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A7610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of A7603 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A7609.

  When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7610 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7610 is “Y”), that is, the time has expired or has already expired, Is completed, or when unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a magnet unauthorized notification end command is prepared as an effect command (A7611).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (A7612), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A7613 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (result of A7613 is “N”), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (A7614), and the production command is set. The process is executed (A7615). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121, that is, It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A7701). When the radio wave sensor is on (result of A7701 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A7702).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave fraud notification command as an effect command (A7703), and prepares a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag indicating that a board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7704). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A7701 is “N”), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 determines the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time. If it is not 0, -1 is updated (A7705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A7706). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7706 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7706 is “Y”), that is, the time has expired or has already expired, When the notification is completed or when unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating unauthorized radio notification is prepared as an effect command (A7707). Furthermore, a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7708), and it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7709).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A7709 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A7709 is “N”), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7710), and the effect command setting process is executed (A7711). Thereafter, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (A1305), the winning switch / status monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1314), Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game hall internal management device, or a test firing test device, and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A7801). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A7801 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A7802). When the body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A7802 is “N”), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information output data. Save in the area (A7804).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A7801 is “Y”), or the body frame opening error is occurring (result of A7802 is “Y”), The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7806).

  After steps A7804 and A7806, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A7807), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up). Determine (A7808). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like (A1026 of main processing). The security signal control timer is counted from the RAM initialization time.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A7808 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring (A7809). If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A7808 is “N”), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A7809 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A7809 is "Y"), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A7811 is “Y”), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

  When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (result of A7811 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the magnet fraud is occurring (A7813). In addition, when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that a magnet fraud is occurring. If a magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A7813 is “N”), it is further determined whether a panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A7814). If the board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio fraud is occurring.

  When the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A7814 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the big prize opening fraud is occurring (A7815). It should be noted that if the illegal prize-winning flag relating to the big prize opening (upper big prize opening or lower big prize opening) is saved in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that the big prize opening fraud is occurring. If the big prize opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A7815 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is occurring ( A7816). If the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring. When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is not occurring (the result of A7816 is “N”), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7817).

  On the other hand, the gaming control device 100 determines that the prize winning port fraud is incorrect when the magnet fraud is occurring (result of A7813 is “Y”), when the board radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A7814 is “Y”). When it is occurring (result of A7815 is “Y”), or when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (result of A7816 is “Y”), the on-data of the security signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (A7818) and save the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A7819). The security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) by setting the security signal on data.

  After steps A7817 and A7819, the game control apparatus 100 starts the opening 1 signal editing process (A7820), starting port 2 signal editing process (A7821), main prize ball signal editing process (A7822), symbol determination number signal editing process ( A7823) is executed, and the external information editing process is terminated. The start port 1 signal editing process is a process when the start port 1 switch 36a is input, and the start port 2 signal editing process is a process when the start port 2 switch 37a is input.

[Starter 1 signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port 1 signal editing process (A7020) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port 1 signal editing process.

  First, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (A7901). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (A7902).

  When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A7902 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (A7903). ). If the start port 1 signal output count is not 0 (the result of A7903 is “N”), the start port 1 signal output count is updated by −1 (A7904), and the start port 1 signal output control timer area has a start port. 1 signal output control timer initial value is saved (A7905).

  The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a time (for example, 128 msec) obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time of the start port 1 signal and the OFF state (for example, low level) time.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the start port 1 signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7907), and ends the start port 1 signal editing process.

  In addition, when the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is 0 (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sends off data for turning off the starting port 1 signal for the external device to the outside of the RWM. The data is saved in the information output data area (A7908), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A7902 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A7906). Note that the fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (the result of A7906 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs on data for turning on the start port 1 signal to the external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A7907), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (the result of A7906 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device. The data is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7908), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

[Starter 2 signal editing process]
Next, the starting port 2 signal editing process (A7021) in the external information editing process is merely a replacement of “starting port 1” with “starting port 2” in the starting port 1 signal editing process. The drawing is omitted.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A7022) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  First, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (A8001). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A8002).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8002 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0. (A8003).

  When the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A8003 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by −1 (A8004), and outputs the main prize ball signal output. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the control timer area (A8005). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a time (eg, 128 msec) obtained by adding the time of the main prize ball signal on state (eg, high level) and the off state (eg, low level).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves on data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8007), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (the result of A8003 is “Y”), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A8008), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8002 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A8006). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (the result of A8006 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of the RWM. Save in the data area (A8007). Further, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A8006 is “N”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A8008), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
Next, details of the symbol determination number signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol determination number signal editing process. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process of outputting a symbol determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to the external device.

  The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (A8101). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (A8102).

  When the value of the symbol determination count signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8102 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the symbol determination count signal output count is 0. (A8103).

  When the symbol determination number signal output count is not 0 (the result of A8103 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the symbol determination count signal output count by −1 (A8104), and outputs the symbol determination count signal output. The initial value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is saved in the control timer (A8105). The symbol fixed number signal output control timer initial value is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 256 msec) of the on state (for example, high level) and the time (for example, 300 msec) of the off state (for example, low level) of the symbol determined number signal. (For example, 556 msec).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the ON data for turning on the symbol determination number signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8107), and ends the symbol determination number signal editing process. In addition, when the symbol determination number signal output count is 0 (the result of A8103 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A8108), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8102 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A8106). Note that the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 msec).

  When the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section (result of A8106 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs external data of the RWM to turn on the symbol determination frequency signal. Save to the data area (A8107). Further, when the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A8106 is “N”), the off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A8108), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

[Variation of control of game control device]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the control (processing) of the game control device will be described. Configurations other than those described below are the same as the above-described control (processing) of the game control device.

  In the above control processing (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, etc.), during the fluctuation of one special figure fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game), the other special figure fluctuation display game. When (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display Game or Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Game) is a hit result (big hit or small hit), one special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination) by the result of losing. However, as in the following modification, in this case, with respect to this one special figure variation display game, the measurement of the variation time by the timer is interrupted and the game result is derived (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number). It is also possible to postpone the special figure change display game that has been interrupted after the hit operation related to the other special figure change display game is ended (after the big hit state or the small hit state ends).

  Even when the special figure variation display game is interrupted, the variation of the special symbol (identification information) is apparently continued in the display device 41 and the special figure fluctuation display unit (the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52). (Note that it is also possible to temporarily stop special symbol fluctuations during interruption). In the case where the fluctuation is apparently continued, it can be said that, in another concept, the fluctuation time is extended with respect to one special figure by the time of the hit operation (the time of the big hit state or the small hit state) with respect to the other special figure. .

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the above-described special figure 1 game process (A1310) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process according to the modification. FIG. 82 is obtained by adding the process of step S8200 to FIG. The processing from steps A3201 to A3220 in FIG. 82 is the same as that in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8200). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is “N”), the processing from step A3201 to A3220 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8200 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of steps A3201 to A3218 and changes the special figure 1 display 51. After preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for control (A3219), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is ended. In this way, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the time keeping (update) of the fluctuation time timer (the special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time is stopped. Note that, by the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself is apparently continued in the special symbol 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the above-described special figure 2 game process (A1311) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process according to the modification. FIG. 83 is obtained by adding the process of step S8300 to FIG. The processing from step A3301 to A3323 in FIG. 83 is the same as that in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not a special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8300). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is "N"), the processing from step A3301 to A3323 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8300 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of steps A3301 to A3321, and changes the special figure 2 display 52. After preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for control (A3322), the symbol fluctuation control process which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed (A3323), and a special figure 2 game process is complete | finished. In this way, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the time keeping (update) of the fluctuation time timer (the special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time is stopped. Note that, by the symbol fluctuation control process, the special symbol fluctuation itself is apparently continued in the special symbol 2 display 52.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Process (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process according to the modification. FIG. 84 is obtained by deleting steps A5311 to A5319 in FIG. 53 and adding steps S8411 to S8416. The processes in steps A5301 to A5310 and steps A5320 to A5325 in FIG. 84 are the same as those in FIG.

  The game control device 100 is in a case where the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of big hit or small hit) and the special figure 2 is in fluctuation (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A5309) When the result is “N” and the result of A5310 is “Y”), the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted by the processing of steps S8411 to S8416. When the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of date and when the special figure 2 is changing (S8411). . If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (the result of S8411 is “Y”), whether or not the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer = 4 msec). Determination is made (S8412). That is, based on the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variable display game. To do.

  When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game process timer is 4 msec (the result of S8412 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (the current timer interrupt). The special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to 0 after starting in the process, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be terminated with the result of losing. Therefore, in this case, since it is not necessary to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, the process proceeds to step A5324.

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of place (the result of S8411 is “N”), or the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec (the result of S8412 is “N” ”), A special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8413). The special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8300 described above. Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and an effect command setting process is executed (S8415). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command can set an effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413), and the special figure 2 game process timer is not updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process. Here, instead, the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). As a result, when the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted, the special figure 2 game processing timer can be prevented from being excessively increased by 4 msec (see FIG. 105).

  After step S8416, the game control device 100 executes steps A5320 to A5325 as in FIG. Note that, in the special figure 1 changing process according to the modified example, unlike the FIG.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Process (Modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification. FIG. 85 is obtained by deleting the processes of steps A5411 to A5419 of FIG. 54 and adding the processes of steps S8511 to S8513. The processes in steps A5401 to A5410 and steps A5420 to A5425 in FIG. 85 are the same as those in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 is in the case where the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of big hit or small hit) and the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A5409) When the result is “N” and the result of A5410 is “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted by the processing of steps S8511 to S8513. When the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted.

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of sync and the special figure 1 is changing, the game control device 100 displays a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. Set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8200 described above. Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and an effect command setting process is executed (S8513). Receiving the decoration special figure 1 interruption command, the effect control device 300 can set an effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game.

  After step S8513, the game control device 100 executes steps A5420 to A5325 as in FIG. In the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification, unlike FIG. 54, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special Figure 1 Big Hit End Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process according to the modification. FIG. 86 is obtained by adding steps S8617 to S8621 to FIG. The processing from step A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 86 is the same as that in FIG.

  After step A6716, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (S8617). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (the result of S8617 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8620). The 2-game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is terminated.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of S8617 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing to resume the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It prepares as a command (S8618) and performs an effect command setting process (S8619). The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621). Then, the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

  By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is “ N "). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed.

  Note that the process of step S8621 is the same process as step A6717 of FIG. 67, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game after the big hit state is ended by the special figure 1 variable display game. (Resume) is set to delay the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and is 8 msec, which is twice the interrupt cycle. As a result, the timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can restart the special figure 2 fluctuation display game simultaneously with the start of the new special figure 1 fluctuation display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game is started (restarted) in the current timer interrupt process before the special figure 1 variable display game. Note that if there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts (restarts) before the special figure 1 variable display game after the big hit state ends, the process of step A8621 is omitted. Thus, the special figure 2 game wait time value need not be set.

  Also, depending on the special figure 2 game wait time value, the change start determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is made at the next timer interrupt processing, but the decorative special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100, so that the time for one interrupt (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special Figure 2 Big Hit End Processing (Modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot end process according to the modification. FIG. 87 is obtained by adding steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. The processing from step A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 87 is the same as that in FIG.

  After step A6816, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (S8717). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (the result of S8717 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720). End the big hit end process.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8717 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game. It prepares as a command (S8718) and performs an effect command setting process (S8719). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is terminated.

  By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is “ N "). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed.

  In the special figure 2 big hit end process, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set. This is because, even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started (restarted) within the next timer interruption process (FIG. 12).

[Special Figure 1 Small Hit End Processing (Modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hits end process according to the modification. FIG. 88 is obtained by adding steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. The processing from step A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 72 is the same as that in FIG.

  When the gaming control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A7207 is “Y”), or after step A7209, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (S8810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8810 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is displayed. The process is saved in the processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of S8810 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing to restart the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It prepares as a command (S8811) and performs an effect command setting process (S8812). The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is terminated. To do. Thus, in the next timer interruption process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be resumed simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Note that the process of step S8814 is the same process as step A7210 of FIG. Further, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is resumed.

[Special Figure 2 Small Hit End Processing (Modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits end process according to the modification. FIG. 89 is obtained by adding the processing of steps S8911 to S8814 to FIG. The processing from step A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 73 is the same as that in FIG.

  When the gaming control apparatus 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A7308 is “Y”), or after step A7310, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (S8911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8911 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8911 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes the effect command setting process. (S8913). Receiving the decoration special figure 1 restart command, the effect control device 300 can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. Note that by clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted can be resumed.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production | presentation control apparatus 300 performs with the program for production control is demonstrated. For convenience of explanation, the control of the production control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above-described modified example of the control of the game control device 100 (configuration that resumes the suspended special figure variation display game). In the case of a basic configuration that forcibly terminates the special figure variation display game (configuration that is not a modified example), the processing related to the suspension and resumption of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1003), and an interrupt is permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 and the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initial setting (B1002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for accepting an operation such as a change in brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the player is executed (B1011). And the random number update process for updating random numbers, such as production random numbers, is performed (B1011), the received command received from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed, and the corresponding received command check process is performed (B1012). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing for updating various data in accordance with the content displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, drawing drawing preparation to the display frame buffer is completed and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1014).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is a frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1015 is “N”), the processing of B1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1015 is “Y”), the display to the display device 41 is performed. The screen drawing is instructed (B1016). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice, the frame is switched. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs or the like (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute an accessory action effect.

  And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B1008, after finishing the process of B1019 mentioned above. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1019 is repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, details of the received command check process (B1012) in the main process (FIG. 90) described above will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the command reception number is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and the received command check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, the data is not overwritten.

  Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1 only) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command reading indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106). If the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N ]), The process from step B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception by always ensuring a free area without directly analyzing in the reception command buffer.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents in the analysis command area (B1107), and analyzes the received command to analyze the contents. The process is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to Fig. 92. The address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the process of step B1101 is performed. It is determined whether or not the analysis for the number of commands received is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is “N”), the processing from step B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 91) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control apparatus 300 first separates the received command as the MODE part and the lower byte as the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 600 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE section indicating the type of command. The Therefore, the upper and lower orders of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE portion indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE portion is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION portion is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the contents of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (value assigned as the command specification indicating the contents). If the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and includes variation commands (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 50). If the MODE portion represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent a variable command (result of B1205 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit or a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), for example, a hit symbol command, a round command, a small hit open command, etc. . If the MODE portion represents a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent a winning command (result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the design command range (B1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4316a in FIG. 43A) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4316b in FIG. 43B) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE portion represents a single command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a single command (the result of B1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (B1213). . The prefetch symbol commands include the above-described prefetch stop symbol command (A3111 in FIG. 31). If the MODE portion represents a pre-read symbol system command (result of B1213 is “Y”), the pre-read symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the prefetched symbol system command (the result of B1213 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the prefetched variation command (B1215). ). The prefetch variation command includes the above-described prefetch variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 31). If the MODE portion represents a prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1215 is “N”), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is terminated.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 93B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of the single command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE portion represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “Y”), a RAM initialization setting process for informing the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the single command processing is performed. finish.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). If the MODE unit represents a command for restoration from a power failure (the result of B1305 is “Y”), a power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted (when there is a special figure game interruption flag backed up in the RWM), the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a special figure. A suspended command (suspending command) indicating that the 1-variable display game is suspended or that the special figure 2-variable display game is suspended is included.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “Y”), a customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command processing ends.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. Is determined (B1311). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), a special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, and therefore the processing of steps B1311 and B1312 may be omitted. However, when the special figure 2 start display memory is generated, the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately (for example, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, etc.) In the case of the special figure start port 2 switch process (FIG. 30), the special figure hold information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process) is performed, and the game control device 100 sends a special figure 2 hold number command. May be transmitted.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent the probability information command (the result of B1313 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion represents an error / unauthorized command ( B1315). As error / unauthorized commands, for example, fraud occurrence command (A2108), fraud cancellation command (A2116), special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (A2414), special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command (A2418), state off There is a command (A2504) and a state on command (A2507). If the MODE part represents an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / unauthorization setting process is executed to notify or cancel the error or the unauthorized (B1316). End single-shot command processing.

  When the MODE unit does not represent an error / unauthorized command (result of B1315 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command for effect mode switching. Determination is made (B1317). If the MODE portion represents a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “Y”), the effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a command for symbol stop. (B1319). Note that the symbols stop command includes a decorative special figure 1 stop command and a decorative special figure 2 stop command. If the MODE portion represents a symbol stop command (result of B1319 is “Y”), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (B1320). If the command is not normal (the result of B1320 is “N”), the single command processing is terminated.

  If the command is a normal command (the result of B1320 is “Y”), the production control device 300 performs stop setting for stopping the corresponding special figure (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) (B1321). When all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 are stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single command processing is terminated. The game state flag is a flag that can indicate other states such as changing, big hit, and small hit.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the symbol stop command (result of B1319 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the variation interruption command. (B1323). Note that the commands for interrupting the variation are the above-described decorative special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 in FIG. 85) and the decorative special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 in FIG. 84). If the MODE part represents a command for interrupting the change (result of B1323 is “Y”), the change interrupt setting process is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a change interruption command (the result of B1323 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a change restart command. (B1325). Note that the commands for resuming the fluctuation are the above-described decorative special figure 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 87) and the decorative special figure 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 86). If the MODE portion represents a command for interrupting the change (result of B1325 is “Y”), the change restart setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  Even if the change interruption command is not received, if a hit system command related to the effect (big hit or small win) of one of the special figure change display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is received, The effect control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the other decoration special figure variation display game is being executed, and perform the variation interruption setting process and the subsequent variation resumption setting process.

[Change interruption setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the change interruption setting process (B1324) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 93) described above will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received change interruption command is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not normal (the result of B1401 is “N”), the change interruption setting process is terminated. If it is a normal command (result of B1401 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the command is received when the power is turned on (B1402). If the command is received when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is “Y”), the decoration special figure change display game is performed in response to the received command (decoration special figure 1 interruption command or decoration special figure 2 interruption command). The suspended flag of the decorative special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that is suspended is set (B1403).

  When the command is not received when the power is turned on (result of B1402 is “N”), the effect control device 300 is changing the symbol (decoration special figure 1 or special ornament figure 2) to be interrupted. It is determined whether or not the change display game of the symbol to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). If the target symbol is not changing (the result of B1404 is “N”), the change interruption setting process is terminated. If the target symbol is changing (the result of B1404 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the received change interruption command is a decorative special figure 1 interruption command (B1405).

  When the received change interruption command is the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 sets the interruption fluctuation display of the decoration special figure 1 (B1406). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is displayed large at the center, the variable display for interruption is set so that it moves to the corner and is displayed in a reduced size. Alternatively, a variable display for interruption may be set to display in a state of higher transparency than usual. Subsequently, an interrupting flag of the decorative special figure 1 indicating that the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). And it is determined whether it is a low probability state (B1408).

  If the result control device 300 is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”), it determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1409). If the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is “N”), the display device 41 or the like suggests that the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. The display setting of the effect for interruption is executed (B1410), and the variation interruption setting process is terminated.

  When the effect control device 300 is not in the low probability state (result of B1408 is “N”), that is, in the high probability state, the effect of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the display of the effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process is terminated. Also, when the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1409 is “Y”), the big hit effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. The display setting of the effect for interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300 determines that if the received variable interruption command is not the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “N”), that is, if it is a decoration special figure 2 interruption command, the decoration special figure 2 The interruption variation display is set (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variation display of the decorative special figure 2 is greatly enlarged (main display, normal display) at the center, it is moved to the corner and is reduced and reduced. A variable display for interruption may be set, or a variable display for interruption may be set that is displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual. Subsequently, the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 2 indicating that the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). And it is determined whether it is a low probability state (B1413).

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit if the result is not low probability (the result of B1413 is “N”), that is, if the probability is high (B1414). ). If the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is “N”), the display device 41 or the like suggests that the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. The display setting of the effect for interruption is executed (B1415), and the variation interruption setting process is terminated.

  When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is “Y”), the effect of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. The display setting of the display game interruption effect is not performed, and the variation interruption setting process is terminated. Further, when the result of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is “Y”), the display device 41 preferentially displays the big hit effect of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. The display of the effect for interruption of the special figure 2 variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process is terminated.

[Variation restart setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the change restart setting process (B1326) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 93) described above will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control apparatus 300 first determines whether or not the received command for resuming fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (the result of B1501 is “N”), the change restart setting process is terminated. If it is a normal command (result of B1501 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the received command for resuming variation is a decorative special figure 1 restart command (B1502).

  When the received command for resuming fluctuation is a decoration special figure 1 restart command (result of B1502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 changes the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation based on the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the display game is interrupted (B1503). If the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of B1503 is “N”), the variable restart setting process is terminated.

  When the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of B1503 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the interrupting flag of the decorative special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1505). The power failure recovery display is a display that suggests that the power failure has been recovered and that processing after the power failure recovery is being performed. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is “Y”), the change of the recovery special figure 1 for recovery according to the probability state (restarting the recovery special figure 1 variable display game for recovery) is set. (B1506). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1505 is “N”), the decoration special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the probability state is resumed (not for recovery) (B1507).

  On the other hand, if the received command for resuming variation is not the decoration special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is “N”), that is, the effect control apparatus 300 is a decoration special figure 2 restart command, the decoration special figure 2 Based on the interrupting flag, it is determined whether or not the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (B1508). If the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is not interrupted (the result of B1508 is “N”), the variation resumption setting process is terminated.

  When the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is suspended (the result of B1508 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 2 (B1509). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1510). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is “Y”), the change of the recovery decoration special figure 2 according to the probability state is resumed (the recovery special figure 2 variable display game is resumed). (B1511). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is “N”), the restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the probability state (not for recovery) is set (B1512).

  Regarding the processing of Steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, there is a possibility that the probability state has changed between when the decoration special figure variation display game is interrupted and when it is resumed. Therefore, at the time of resumption, the display mode of the symbol differs depending on whether or not the target symbol is in a probability state in which priority display is performed. For example, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during the low probability, the reduced symbol of the special figure 1 continues to fluctuate in the corner of the display device 41. Is resumed in a state where priority display is largely performed in the center of the display device 41. If it is a high probability / short time state at the time of restart, it will restart with the reduced symbol (reduced display).

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the pre-read symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetched symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information on special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure hold number command received latest is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest reserved information is information on special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “Y”), a prefetch symbol type command (prefetch stop symbol command) is displayed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure ones on hold. Save (B1602).

  In the production control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), that is, the latest special figure hold number command received is the special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol system command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number (B1603).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is not transmitted from the game control apparatus 100, and therefore the process of step B1603 is basically not executed. However, when the special figure 2 start display memory is generated, the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately (for example, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, etc.) In the case), the game control device 100 may transmit a decoration special figure 2 hold number command, and the process of step B1603 may be executed.

  The effect control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command after steps B1602 and B1603 (B1604). This is because the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are set, so that the game controller 100 transmits the prefetch variation command following the prefetch symbol command. Thereafter, the look-ahead design command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the prefetch fluctuation command process (B1215) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch fluctuation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command (B1701). When the above-mentioned prefetch fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the prefetch fluctuation system command is waiting to be received. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. When waiting for reception of a prefetching variable command (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetching variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

  Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets a pre-reading variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations of the pattern (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) of the latest reservation information (B1703), Corresponding to the MODE part, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part is acquired (B1704). Next, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and an in-sub-prefetch variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the prefetch variation command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Is saved in the pre-reading fluctuation command area (special figure 1 pre-reading fluctuation command area or special figure 2 pre-reading fluctuation command area) (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

  Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold starts the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half of the change will be long, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half of the change will be short. Therefore, the MODE part of the received prefetch fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal prefetch fluctuation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control apparatus 300 can be handled in the same manner even if the time value of the first half fluctuation changes.

  Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-in-prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there is also a type of reach of the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (second half fluctuation value) of the pre-reading fluctuation command, the number increases and it becomes difficult to check. . For example, there are types of normal reach, such as normal reach minus one stop and normal reach plus one stop. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit indicating the reach of the same system to the same sub-subread pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced, and the load of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing is reduced.

  Next, the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is not normal (the result of B1710 is “N”), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated because the converted command is abnormal.

  When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the latest hold that has occurred most recently is out of date (B1711). . When the latest hold is a win (the result of B1711 is “N”), the performance control device 300 calculates the total time until the latest pending special-figure display game ends variably (B1712). The total time includes the display time of the stop symbol.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decoration special figure variation display game is to be interrupted at the end of the variation of the latest reserved special figure variation display game (B1713). If the latest hold is the special figure 1 hold, the other decorative special figure variation display game is a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, for example, after the calculated total time, when the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is not executed or when the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is out of fluctuation, the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. It is determined not to be interrupted.

  When the other decoration special figure change display game is to be interrupted (the result of B1713 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a pre-reading effect execution plan for the interrupt suspension (B1714). The suspended suspension is a suspension corresponding to the decorative special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, the fact that the execution is scheduled includes that a pre-reading effect is being executed. If there is a plan to execute a prefetch effect for the suspended suspension (the result of B1714 is “Y”), it is determined whether the prefetched effect of suspended suspension is a pending change notice (B1715).

  When the pre-reading effect for suspension on hold is not a hold change notice (result of B1715 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the replacement of the effect for the pre-reading effect on suspension is in time (B1716). If it is impossible to forcibly end the pre-reading production, it is determined that the production replacement is not in time (no replacement is performed). If the effect replacement is in time (the result of B1716 is “Y”), the converted command is saved in the pre-reading variable command area corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds so that the effect is replaced (B1717).

  The production control device 300 suspends the suspension when the latest suspension is out of order (the result of B1711 is “Y”), and when the other decoration special figure variation display game is not suspended (the result of B1713 is “N”). If the pre-reading effect is not scheduled to be executed (the result of B1714 is “N”), if the pre-reading effect of suspension suspension is a pre-change notice (the result of B1715 is “Y”), the replacement of the effect is not in time (B1716) The result is “N”), and the process directly proceeds to step B1718 without replacing the production.

  Next, the production control device 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the prefetch change command area (B1718), and executes prefetch lottery processing related to the latest hold prefetch effect (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pending pre-reading notice effect is generated (B1720). When the latest pending pre-reading notice effect occurs (result of B1720 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect to be generated is an effect that immediately starts (B1721). An effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice. When the prefetching notice effect to be generated is an effect that immediately starts (result of B1721 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1722). Then, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, the effect control apparatus 300 does not generate the latest pre-reading notice effect (the result of B1720 is “N”), or when the generated prefetching notice effect is not an effect that immediately starts (the result of B1721 is “N”). ) As it is. The prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the special figure start port 2 switch process does not perform the special figure hold information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process), so the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 hold) On the other hand, the prefetch symbol command (prefetch stop symbol command) and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control device 100. For this reason, the processing from step B1715 to B1717 is not basically executed. However, when the special figure 2 start display memory is generated, the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately (for example, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, etc.) In the case), the pre-read symbol system command and the pre-read variation command for the special figure 2 start-up memory (special figure 2 hold) are transmitted from the game control device 100, and the processing from step B1711 to B1717 may be executed. Good.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the symbol system command process (B1210) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets a special figure type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol-related command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE portion and the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, since the symbol distribution ratio changes, a symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol types are the above-mentioned outlier symbol, 2R probability variation symbol, 4R probability variation symbol, 8R probability variation symbol, and 16R probability variation symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command process (B1206) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable command (variable command) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether or not the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the term “inconsistency” means that there is a contradiction in performing an effect, for example, when a symbol-type command with a probabilistic variation is received even though a variation-type command is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1903 is “Y”), the variation command processing is terminated.

  When the variation-type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation-type command (variation command) (B1904), and displays the effect during the variation. The variation effect setting process to be set is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, a special state change is set to the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-read effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the changing effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described changing command process (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a reachless variation (a variation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, and production mode is set (B2002), and the variation command ( The address of the first half notice allocation group table corresponding to the MODE portion of the variable command) and the number of reserved special figure types is acquired (B2003). In the case of fluctuation without reach, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

  When the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the variation pattern type is reachable variation, the production control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, and the symbol type. The advance allocation group address table is set (B2004), and the address of the first half allocation group table corresponding to the MODE portion of the change command (change command) and the change pattern type is acquired (B2005).

  The production control device 300 performs a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after Steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Subsequently, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (B2007), and the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable command is set. Acquired (B2008), a lottery of notices appearing during the latter half of the change (during reach) is performed (B2009). Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). Note that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be found from the fluctuation commands.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the notice lottery result (B2011). Then, the stop symbol of the special display variation display game is determined according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, by determining the loose eye in the case of the off-line symbol.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B2013 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2015. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the current variation is related to the main display symbol (B2014). The current variation is a decorative special map variation display game executed by the current variation command. For example, when the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is greatly enlarged (normally displayed) at the center of the display device 41, the special figure 1 is the main display.

  When the current variation is related to the symbol that is the main display (result of B2014 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the variation effect (B2015) and performs display setting of the notice effect. (B2016). Subsequently, the hold reduction display setting corresponding to the special figure type is performed (B2017), and the sound number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and the decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

  Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B2019), and a fourth special symbol other than the first to third special symbols which fluctuate on the display device 41. If there is (fourth symbol), display setting for the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (B2020). Note that the fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41.

  On the other hand, the production control device 300 is displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of B2013 is “Y”), and when the current variation is not related to the main display (the result of B2014 is “ N "), that is, when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation during the power failure recovery display and relates to the symbol displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the display device 41, the fluctuation presentation and the notice presentation are performed so as not to perform a flashy presentation. Etc. (B2015 to B2018) are not performed, and display settings for decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type are set (B2019).

[Modification of control of production control device]
Below, the modification of control (process) of an effect control apparatus is demonstrated. Configurations other than those described below are the same as the above-described control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Fluctuation interruption setting process (variation)]
A modified example of the above-described variation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change interruption setting process according to the modification. FIG. 101 is obtained by deleting steps B1402, B1403, B1410, and B1415 from FIG. 94 and adding steps T2115, T2116, T2117, and T2118. In FIG. 101, the same processing as that in FIG. 94 is denoted by the same step number (symbol), and description thereof is omitted.

  The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is in a low probability state (result of B1408 is “Y”), and the result of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is not big hit (result of B1409 is “N”), the freeze display setting of the changing effect of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is performed (T2115). The changing effects include the aforementioned changing effects and notice effects. The freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving picture). Here, display setting of a series of movies until freezing may be performed. Subsequently, display setting of a superimposed image (such as a movie display of a character or the like) for freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2116).

  In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is not in a low probability state (result of B1413 is “N”), and the result of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (B1414). The result is “N”), and the freeze display setting of the changing effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is performed (T2117). The changing effects include the aforementioned changing effects and notice effects. The freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving picture). Here, display setting of a series of movies until freezing may be performed. Subsequently, display setting of a superimposed video for freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2118).

  In the above, freeze effect is performed after receiving the special drawing suspension command, but based on the prefetch command, the production is performed before receiving the special drawing suspension command and the special drawing suspension command is received. At the same time, you may be able to enhance your interest by creating a freezing effect.

[Fluctuation resumption setting process (modified example)]
A modified example of the above-described fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change restart setting process according to the modification. FIG. 102 includes steps T2210-T2215 and T2216-T2221 in place of the steps B1505-B1507 and B1510-B1512 of FIG. In FIG. 102, the same processing as that in FIG. 95 is assigned the same step number (symbol), and description thereof is omitted.

  After step B1504, the effect control device 300 sets the variation restart of the decorative special figure 1 (resumption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) according to the probability state (T2210). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is “Y”), the change restart of the decoration special figure 1 with the reduced symbol (reduction display) (resumption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game) is set (T2212). ).

  The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time when the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of T2211 is “N”) ( T2213). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is “Y”), the display setting of the rewind effect and the playback speed are set (T2214), and the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated. In the display device 41, the rewind effect is performed again at a high playback speed once again before the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is “N”), the rewind effect is displayed and the accessory driving is set using the electric accessory because the time for the rewind effect is insufficient (T2215). ), The fluctuation resumption setting process is terminated.

  Also, the decoration special figure 2 restart command effect control device 300 sets, after step B1509, the change restart of the decoration special figure 2 (resumption of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) according to the probability state (T2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2217 is “Y”), the change restart of the decoration special figure 2 with the reduced symbol (reduction display) (resumption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game) is set (T2218). ).

  When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of T2217 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (T2219). If the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (the result of T2219 is “Y”), the display setting of the rewind effect and the playback speed are set (T2220), and the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated. In the display device 41, the rewind effect is performed again at a high playback speed once again before the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2219 is “N”), the rewind effect is displayed by using the electric accessory and the accessory drive is set because the time for the rewind effect is insufficient (T2221). ), The fluctuation resumption setting process is terminated.

[Function and effect]
Hereinafter, with reference to the time charts of FIG. 103 to FIG. 110, the operational effects of this embodiment (including modifications) will be described. In FIG. 103 to FIG. 110, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are abbreviated as the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the display device based on the establishment of the start condition, and a result mode of the variable display game. Is a predetermined result mode (a hit result mode including a small hit result mode and a big hit result mode), it is possible to generate a predetermined gaming state (a small hit state, a big hit state) that can give a game value to the player.

  The special figure 1 game process as the first control means executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning prize port 36). Take control. The special figure 2 game process as the second control means executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning in the second start winning prize port 37). Take control.

  Both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be in a running state (execution state). When one of the special display game and the special figure 2 display game is in the hit result mode (predetermined result mode), the other display game is terminated and the other change game is terminated. The display game may be used as a result of disengagement (FIGS. 53, 54, 56A, and 56B). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the trouble that both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game become the hit result mode. If both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stopped in the hit result mode, the gaming machine 10 performs a hit operation related to one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A problem occurs because it can only be executed.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 103, a process (FIGS. 53, 54, 55A, and 55B) is executed to stop the variation display of one variation display game in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 103). At this time, it is possible to execute a process for forcibly ending the variation display of the other variation display game in the result mode (FIGS. 53, 54, 56A, and 56B). Thereby, the other variable display game can be continued as much as possible. Also, the new other variable display game is not started until the predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) that occurs when one variable display game is in the hit result mode (see FIG. 35 of FIG. 35). Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing in FIG. 36). Thereby, it is possible to further prevent the trouble that both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game become the hit result mode.

  Also, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 104, when one variation display game is in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 104), the execution time (variation time) of the other variation display game is measured (measured). The other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the update of the special figure game processing timer (time measuring means) (modified example of FIGS. 82, 83, 84, and 85). When the predetermined game state that occurs when one of the variable display games is in the hit result mode is completed, the other variable display game can be restarted by restarting the update of the special figure game processing timer (time measuring means) (FIG. 82). 83, FIG. 86 to FIG. As indicated by the hatched portion in FIG. 104, the other variation display game after resumption can be executed for the remaining variation time after the interruption (time remaining in the timer).

  In addition, since the game can be resumed even if the other variable display game is interrupted, unlike the case where the game is forcibly stopped in the result mode, when the other variable display game is a hit result, It is possible to generate a predetermined gaming state (small hit state, big hit state) by the display game, and it is possible to prevent a problem that a player's profit is impaired. For example, if one variation display game derives the small hit result mode while the other variation display game in the big hit result mode is being executed, the other variation display game is interrupted. When the state is over, the other variation display game can be resumed to derive the jackpot result mode.

  Further, when executing the process of stopping the fluctuation display of one fluctuation display game in the hit result mode, the process of interrupting the fluctuation display of the other fluctuation display game is executed. Can continue. While the other variation display game is interrupted, if the identification information of the other variation display game is displayed in a variable manner, the apparent variation can be continued, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM 111b) of the game control means (game control device 100) includes a main process and a timer interrupt process for the main process. Note that the present embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interruption process, the special figure 1 game process (first control means, first control process) has priority over the special figure 2 game process (second control means, second control process). After the process, the special figure 2 game process is executed.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105 (a), when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a winning result mode and the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 83) Since the game process timer cannot be updated, the special figure 2 game process timer (timer) that measures the execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game is updated only for the time (4 msec) of one interrupt cycle (step A8416 in FIG. 84). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the special figure 2 variable display game after the change is resumed is executed for the time of one interruption cycle. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105 (b), when the timer is not updated, the interrupt period is 1 with respect to the entire variation time (t1 before the interruption + t2 after the interruption) when the update is performed. The overall variation time increases by the time of the batch (4 msec). On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a winning result mode and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, it is not necessary to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 106 (a), there is a predetermined gaming state (small hit game state in FIG. 106) that occurs when the special figure 2 variable display game is in a hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 106). When the game ends, the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not delayed by a predetermined time (wait time) by the delay timer (delay means) (FIGS. 87 and 89). On the other hand, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 106 (b), when the predetermined game state that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode ends, the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with a delay timer ( The delay means) delays the predetermined time (wait time of 8 msec) (S8621 in FIG. 86, S8814 in FIG. 88). By setting the delay timer, the timer interrupt process after the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game can restart the special figure 2 variable display game simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game.

  In addition, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 107 (a), the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed regardless of the fluctuation display state of the special figure 2 variable display game (stopped state, apparent changed state during interruption, etc.). A delay timer (8 msec wait time) may be set. As a result, in the timer interrupt process that performs the end process of the predetermined gaming state (the hit end process of FIGS. 67, 72, 86, and 88) that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode, The special figure 2 fluctuation display game by the special figure 2 game process cannot be started (FIGS. 33 and 83). If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interruption process after the predetermined game state end process, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are used. The fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started simultaneously. In addition, at the timing of the end process of the predetermined gaming state, when the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory are already present (when the special figure 2 start memory is configured to be accumulated), or at this timing, the first start When there is a winning at the winning opening 36 and a winning at the second start winning opening 37, the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied.

  In addition, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 107 (b), when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hit result mode, the timer interrupt process after the end process of the predetermined gaming state is set without setting the delay timer. If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are started simultaneously by the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. it can.

  Furthermore, when one variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped in the hit result mode, the remaining variation display game of the other variation display game Processing corresponding to the variation time (value of the special figure game processing timer) may be performed (S8412 in FIG. 84). In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are ended at the same timing and the hit result is derived at the same time.

  For example, based on the remaining variation time of the other variation display game, the other variation display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as one variation display game that stops in the winning result mode. Is determined (S8412 in FIG. 84). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game process executed after the special figure 1 game process for stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the hit result mode, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be zero. (It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec in the special figure 1 changing process).

  When the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as when the special figure 1 variable display game stops in the hit result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game If the result mode is the hit result mode, the interruption process in which the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and the suspension of the variable display is postponed within the special figure 1 game process (the special figure 1 changing process in FIG. 84). If the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game is the outlier result mode, the special figure 2 variation display game is out of the special result state within the special figure 2 game process (particularly the special figure 2 variation process in FIG. 85). Process to stop.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108 (a), the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted in the situation where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may derive the hit result at the same time. Thus, it is possible to perform an interruption process for postponing the suspension of the variable display. Then, priority is given to the derivation of the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the hit state (winning action) by the special figure 1 variable display game starts first. After the hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is finished, the hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is derived (the apparent fluctuation display during the interruption is stopped), and the hit state by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (hit Operation) starts, so there is no disadvantage to the player. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started even if there is a special figure 1 start memory (special figure 1 hold) during the hit state (hit action) by the special figure 2 variable display game (result of A3501 in FIG. 35) "N").

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108 (b), the special figure 2 variable display game ends at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variable display game that derives the hit result (here, the small hit). If there is a possibility, if the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the outlier result mode, a process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game in the off result mode is performed. Even if this outlier result mode is derived as it is, no problem occurs. When performing the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game in the outlier result mode, the stop display time of the outlier result mode (the time from the stop to the confirmation of the outlier result) is the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game. If it is set to be the same as the stop display time of the mode (the time from the stop until the confirmation of the hit result (fanfare start)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Also, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 109 and 110, the game control device 100 (game control means) can recover from a power failure when a power failure occurs and the power is restored (powered on) while the other variable display game is interrupted. After the restoration (at the time of restoration or after restoration), before the execution control of one of the variable display games is started, an interruption control (interrupt command) indicating that the other variable display game is being interrupted is produced. 300 (production control means) (A1022 in FIG. 9B, B1305 in FIG. 93A). The production control device 300 can grasp that the other variable display game is interrupted and one of the variable display games is in a hit state (during a hitting operation) by the interrupting command, Corresponding processes such as a process of displaying the winning symbol on the display device 41 (see the recovery screen display 1 in FIGS. 109 and 110) can be performed.

  The production control device 300 may display a recovery screen (power failure recovery display) that suggests recovery of the power failure on the display device 41 when the power failure is recovered. Then, when the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the main display (first display) is interrupted, the command related to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game that has been interrupted after the power failure is restored. When the (command) is received, the recovery screen may be terminated. Examples of the commands related to the control of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game include a fluctuation command relating to the start of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (see FIG. 109) and a special decoration figure stop command relating to the stop of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (see FIG. 110). When a command (command) related to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game on the side (reduced display side, second display side) displayed in a size different from the main display is received, the restoration screen is not terminated.

  When returning to the normal screen after the recovery screen is finished with the decorative special figure stop command, the default stop pattern may be used for the stoppage stop symbol. In the case of a winning stop symbol, a default winning symbol corresponding to the game value (number of rounds, etc.) in the winning state may be used. The background of the normal screen may correspond to a probability state or the like.

  There is a possibility of receiving a command related to the control of the special display variation display game on the side other than the main display (reduction display side) before receiving the command related to the control of the special display variation display game on the main display. However, if the recovery screen is terminated at that time, there is a possibility that a problem occurs. For example, if the recovery screen is ended and the normal screen is displayed at the start of the reduced special display variation display game, even though the probability is low, the player is told that the probability change state (short time state) is in progress. There is a risk of misunderstanding. Therefore, as shown in the recovery screen display 2 in FIGS. 109 and 110, even if a command related to the start of a new change in the reduced special display variation display game (decoration special view 2 here) is received, the change is simply changed. Just start the display and do not exit the recovery screen.

  The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) stores the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game as the start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition. It is possible. The start memory display control means (for example, the segment LED editing process in FIG. 75 or the main process in FIG. 90) determines the number of start memories stored in the start memory means by using a predetermined start memory display area of the display device or the display device. It is possible to notify the player by displaying on the screen. Then, the production control device 300 normally displays the number of start memories and the variation display of the variation display game resumed after the interruption in the restoration screen after restoration on the display device 41 (when the restoration screen is not being displayed). It may be displayed in a state with higher transparency. If the apparent variation display is continued even during the interruption, the variation display continued during the interruption may be displayed with a high transparency. In the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed on the main display may be shake fluctuation.

(Second Embodiment)
The gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, an embodiment (configuration) common to the first embodiment is applicable unless otherwise specified.

[Game board]
FIG. 111 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area for the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of identification information.

  In the center case 40, an inflow port 40c to the warp passage 40a for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b in which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. And are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 33, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b is the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation. It is easy to win the winning device 33. A lamp display device 80 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 32. The lamp display device 80 displays the starting memory number of each special figure variation display game.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34 a (see FIG. 129) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of a game ball in the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35 a to 35 n (see FIG. 129) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game, and a normal variable winning apparatus 33 just below that is provided. Is provided. The normal variation winning device 33 includes a movable member 33c that is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. When the movable member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball is prevented from winning the normal variation winning device 33.

  In the second embodiment, unlike the conventional case, the special figure 1 variation display game is executed immediately by winning the prize winning port (general power prize winning port) of the normal variable prize winning device 33, or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored. The configuration is memorized. Therefore, the general power prize winning opening (first start winning area) is included in the category of the first starting winning prize port 36, and the general power winning prize port switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 129). That is, the general electric winning opening and the first start winning opening 36 correspond to a plurality of first start winning areas, and at least a part of the first start winning areas among the plurality of first starting winning areas is in a closed state and an open state. It is comprised as the normal variation prize-winning apparatus 33 which has the movable member 33c which can be converted into.

  In the second embodiment, the game control device (game control means) 100 converts the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the normal variation display game. Is connected to the ordinary electric solenoid 33b (conversion control means) (see FIG. 129). The movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 is an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the general winning prize opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the ordinary electric solenoid 33b. In addition, as the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33, the so-called bello-type that allows the game ball to flow into the general power prize winning opening by sliding the movable member 33c back and forth by the general power solenoid 33b. Ordinary electric accessories may be provided. The game control device 100 rotates and opens the movable member 33c via the general-purpose solenoid 33b when the result of the general-purpose variable display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, so that the game ball is a normal variable winning device. 33 is changed to an open state in which it can flow into 33.

  In addition, the game control device 100 increases the occurrence frequency of the easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the usual figure variation display game or setting the hit probability of the usual figure fluctuation display game higher than usual. The time-short state (general power support (electric support) state) is generated by extending the generation time of the easy winning state than the easy winning state generated in the gaming state.

  The game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40 is provided with a second start winning opening (second start winning area) 37 for giving a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, a first special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 38 is provided on the left side of the second starting winning port 37, and a second special variable winning device (upper) is provided above the second starting winning port 37. 39 is provided.

  The first special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 38 converts the large winning port into a state in which a game ball can flow in as the tongue-like member (see FIG. 118) moves forward and backward. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure change display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

  The second special variation winning device (upper large winning opening) 39 includes a movable member 39c that is converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. When the movable member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot be awarded to the special variation winning device 39. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure change display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls to the upper big prize opening. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

  The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In the second embodiment, the special game state includes a small hit (first special game state) that can be generated when the small hit mode (first special result) and a big hit mode (second special result). And a jackpot (second special gaming state) that can be generated in the case of becoming.

  In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the winning of the game ball in the general electric prize opening (first start winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first start winning area). Execution control of the variation display game (first variation display game) can be performed. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes first execution control means for performing such control.

  Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning opening (second start winning area) 37. Control can be performed. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes second execution control means for performing such control.

  In addition, as will be described later, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the big hit (second special game state) is finished, is a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the hit probability is high) It is possible to perform control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed with ordinary power support. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes specific game state generation means for performing such control.

  General winning port 35, first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, normal variable winning device 33, large winning port of first special variable winning device 38, and large winning of second special variable winning device 39 When a game ball wins in the mouth, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 129) discharges the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning mouth from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In addition, the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  A ball guiding unit 850 is provided on the upper right of the second special variation winning device 39. The ball guiding unit 850 is a member that guides the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the game area 32 to the second special variation winning device 39 or the like by rolling it in the horizontal direction.

  In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 that display information such as the current gaming state.

(Lamp indicator)
FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a lamp display device 80 according to the second embodiment. The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (flashing) that repeats turning on and off as symbols (fourth special symbol), and the number of start memories stored in each special diagram variable display game. (Holding number) The lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notification is provided. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300.

  The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle as a variable display. While the game control device 100 measures the change time of the change display in the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, and the general display display 53 of the collective display device 50, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300.

  The lamp display units 3 and 4 (decoration special figure 1 hold LED1, decoration special figure 1 hold LED2) display the decoration special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) according to the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (decoration special figure 2 hold LED1, decoration special figure 2 hold LED2) indicate the decoration special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) according to the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. indicate.

  The blinking cycle of the lamp display units 1 and 2 (fourth special symbol to be described later) and the blinking cycle of the lamp display unit 3-6 (decoration special figure hold) are both set to the same 200 msec (100 msec on, 100 msec off). However, the blinking period may be made different so as to easily distinguish the decorative special figure hold from the fourth special symbol. Further, the on / off (display / non-display) time of the lamp display unit 1-6 may be varied.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variable display game configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. And a fluctuation display section 52 (special drawing 2 indicator) (lamp D2). Further, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 53 (lamps D3-D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable prize-winning devices 38, 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and a special figure 1 variable display. It has a memory display section 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) (lamps D11-D14) for notifying the number of games started (held). In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a general diagram storage display unit 55 (general map hold display) (lamps D15 to D16) for informing the start (hold) storage number of the normal map display game.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit 56 (first game state display, probability state display unit) (lamp D9) that indicates a winning probability state (a high probability state or a low probability state), and a launch. It has the 2nd game state display part 57 (2nd game state display) (D17) which displays the direction (left-handed or right-handed) instruction | indication. Further, the collective display device 50 includes a third gaming state display unit 58 (third gaming state indicator) (lamps D8, D10, and D18) that displays a hit state of the normal-variation display game. In addition, the collective display device 50 is configured to display a fourth game state display unit 59 (fourth game state display unit, interrupted state display unit) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended ( Lamps D19, D20).

  FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating lighting states of various display units 53-58 (lamps D3-D20) constituting the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment. The collective display device 50 displays the state of gaming machines corresponding to the lighting modes of the various display units 53-57. The round display unit 53 (lamps D3-D7) is lit according to the number of rounds, and the memory display unit 54 (lamps D11-D14) is lit according to the number of suspensions (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 variable display game. To do.

  The general-purpose memory display unit (D15-D16) 55 is lit according to the number of suspensions (starting memory number) of the general-purpose variable display game. In the first game state display unit 56 (lamps D9 and D17), the lamp D9 is turned on in a high probability state, and the lamp D9 is turned off with a low probability. In the second game state display unit 57 (lamp D17), the lamp D17 is turned on when the player strikes right and the lamp D17 is turned off when the player strikes left. In the third game state display section 58 (lamps D8, D10, D18), the respective lamps are turned on / off / flashed in accordance with the lottery result of the usual variable display game. In addition, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening (the general electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 are different for each of the normal figure 1, the common figure 2, and the common figure 3 shown in FIG. 114. Can do.

  In the fourth game state display unit 59 (lamps D19 to D20), D19 is lit while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, and D20 is lit while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, an interruption signal may be output as external information.

[Special variation winning equipment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115 to FIG. 128, the structure of the special variable winning device unit 700 in the second embodiment will be described in detail. FIGS. 115A and 115B are diagrams for explaining the special variable winning device unit 700 according to the second embodiment, where FIG. 115A is a front view and FIG. 115B is a plan view. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the special variable winning device unit 700 in which the open / close door 38c of the second embodiment is closed, and FIG. 117 is a special variable winning device in which the open / close door 38c of the second embodiment is open. 3 is a perspective view of a unit 700. FIG.

  The first special variable winning device 38 is a device that alternately converts the open / close door 38c between a closed state and an open state during a predetermined period during the round game period of the special gaming state, and is provided in the special variable winning device unit 700. . Further, the special variable winning device unit 700 is provided with one general winning port 35 through which a game ball flowing down from the right side can be won (see FIG. 118).

  As shown in FIGS. 115A and 115B, the special variation prize winning device unit 700 includes a front-side decorative portion 720 and a back-side main body portion 760 with the flange-like portion 701f of the base member 701 as a boundary. Consists of. The decoration portion 720 and the main body portion 760 may be visible to the player or may not be visible.

  The decoration portion 720 includes a front decoration member 721 having a decoration on the front surface and an upper side wall 722 formed on the top of the front decoration member 721. The front decoration member 721 includes therein a flow path that guides a winning ball that has won a prize winning or the general prize opening 35 to the back side of the base member 701, and the flow path is formed on the back side of the front decoration member 721. The

  The decorative portion 720 forms a ball passage 724 with the flange-shaped portion 701f of the base member 701, and includes a big prize opening in the middle of the ball passage 724. The ball passage 724 is formed so that the left side is lower than the right side when viewed from the front, and the game ball is designed to flow from the right side to the left side. An upper side wall 722 formed of a translucent material is provided on the front surface of the ball passage 724 so that a game ball flowing down the ball passage 724 is visible.

  The main body 760 is covered with a housing 731 (see FIG. 115B) that houses the base member 701 from the back side and a solenoid cover 771 (see FIG. 115B). Mated.

  From the main body 760, the tongue-shaped member 741 (see FIG. 118) advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, so that the big prize opening is opened and closed as shown in FIGS. The upper surface of the tongue-like member 741 is a flat surface provided with a step, the tip side is formed one step lower, and forms the open / close door 38c. In addition, three raised portions (convex portions) 742 are provided on the top end side of the upper surface of the tongue-like member 741, and have a function of weakening the downward force of the game ball flowing down the ball passage 724. The open / close door 38 c constitutes a part of the bottom of the ball passage 724.

  FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the special variation winning device unit 700 of the second embodiment. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating the decorative portion 720 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 119 is a front view of the base member 701, and FIG. 119 is a rear view of the front decorative member 721. 120A and 120B are views for explaining the main body 760 of the second embodiment. FIG. 120A is a rear view of the base member 701, and FIG. 120B is an exploded perspective view of the housing 731 and the opening / closing door unit 740.

  First, the side structure of the spherical passage 724 provided between the base member 701 and the upper side wall 722 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 (A), the surface of the flange-like portion 701f of the base member 701, which is the back side of the ball passage 724, is a corrugated portion that is a concave and convex surface (friction surface) having a small corrugated shape. 701a is provided. The wavy portion 701a is a portion having a high frictional force that is formed perpendicular to the direction along the ball passage 724, and has a function of weakening the downward force of the game ball that abuts the wavy portion 701a.

  In the wavy portion 701 a, a bowl-shaped rear side ridge (ridge) 702 that is higher than the height of the concavo-convex surface is formed in a direction perpendicular to the direction along the spherical passage 724. The back side protrusions 702 are formed in four strips at a predetermined interval (pitch) in the direction along the ball passage 724. Each shape of the back side protrusion 702 is substantially triangular. The angle of the upstream surface 702a facing the upstream side of the ball passage 724 out of the surfaces of the back surface protrusions 702 rises from the base member 701 at a smaller angle than the downstream surface 702b facing the downstream side of the ball passage 724. The upstream surface 702a has a gentler slope than the downstream surface 702b. Therefore, the ridge formed by combining one side of the upstream surface 702a and one side of the downstream surface 702b is located on the left side of the center line in a front view. In this way, by forming the flange portion with a steep slope on the downstream surface 702b, the width of the rear surface portion (base member 701 side) of the rear surface side ridge portion 702 can be further reduced, and the ball passage 724 has more. The back side protrusion 702 can be provided. The reason why the upstream surface 702a has a gentler slope than the downstream surface 702b is to give an appropriate meander to the game ball flowing down the ball passage 724, as will be described later.

  With this shape, when the game ball flowing down to the left in the ball passage 724 comes into contact with the back-side protrusion 702, the game ball is rolled forward in the ball passage 724 (obliquely forward direction). Therefore, the back-side ridge portion 702 has a function of weakening the flow-down force of the game ball more than the wave-like portion 701a by rolling the game ball flowing down in the lateral direction forward. Further, the back-side ridge portion 702 is not only a game ball that flows down from the right side (upstream side), but also a game ball that flows down to the ball passage 724 from an obliquely upward direction or an upward direction due to the shape of the left and right asymmetric ribs. It is possible to roll, and the game ball is prevented from jumping upward from the ball passage 724.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the rear side of the upper side wall 722 (that is, the front side of the spherical passage 724) has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined interval in a direction perpendicular to the direction along the spherical passage 724. Three front side protrusions (saddle parts) 725 are formed. The front side ridge 725 may be formed in the front part facing the back side ridge 702, but is positioned at an intermediate portion of the pitch of the back side ridge 702 in order to give the game ball a zigzag meander. Each is formed at a place to do.

  Each shape of the front side protrusion 725 is also substantially triangular, but the ridge is formed shorter than the back side (upper side surface). The triangular shape on the bottom side (big prize opening side) of the triangular prism shape is formed with an inclination upward from the back side toward the peak. Further, since the front side ridge portion 725 is formed slightly above the rear side ridge portion 702, only the game balls that bounce off the ball passage 724 come into contact with the back side ridge portion 702. It has a function of retaining a game ball that is about to jump upward from the passage 724 in the ball passage 724.

  Therefore, the back side ridge portion 702 and the front side ridge portion 725 suppress the jumping out of the game ball flowing down from above or obliquely upward to the ball passage 724, and the game ball flowing down from above or obliquely above is also Make it easier to win big prizes. Furthermore, a raised portion (convex portion) 742 provided at the distal end portion of the tongue-like member 741 and a serrated tongue-like member 741 formed so as to have a notch in a plan view at a position corresponding to the raised portion 742. The step 743 (recessed portion) also changes the flow direction of the game ball in an irregular manner, so that the game ball flowing down to the ball passage 724 from the upper side or diagonally upward is prevented from jumping upward, and flows down from above or diagonally upward. Make game balls easier to win in the big prize opening.

  In addition, the back-side ridge 702 and the front-side ridge 725 weaken the downward force of the game ball flowing down the ball passage 724 and make it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Similarly, the raised portion (convex portion) 742 and the step 743 also change the flow direction of the game ball irregularly to weaken the flow of the game ball and make it easier to win the game ball in the big prize opening.

  As described above, the back side protrusion 702, the front side protrusion 725, the raised portion 742, and the step 743 can cause the game balls flowing down the ball passage 724 to stay in the ball passage 724 as much as possible. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is easier for a game ball to win a big prize opening as compared to the case where the back side protrusion 702, the front side protrusion 725, the raised portion 742, and the step 743 are not present. Become. That is, the back side ridge portion 702, the front side ridge portion 725, the raised portion 742, and the step 743 prevent the game ball from jumping upward from the ball passage 724, and the game ball passes through the ball passage 724. By increasing the time required for winning, it functions as a winning assistance means.

  The game ball staying in the ball passage 724 falls at a big winning opening when the open / close door 38c is opened, and wins the game, thus providing an advantageous state for the player and greatly enhancing the interest of the game. be able to. In particular, when a plurality of game balls stay on the open / close door 38c even if the opening is short for about 0.2 seconds, in order to win quickly, it is compared with a gaming machine that does not have a winning assistance means. Greatly improve the fun of gaming.

  Next, the flow path through which the game balls won in the first special variable winning device 38 and the general winning opening 35 pass will be described. The flow path of the general winning opening 35 will be described first. As shown in FIG. 118, an opening 735 facing right upward is formed on the right side of the front decoration member 721, and serves as an opening of the general winning opening 35.

  The game ball that has passed through the opening 735 flows down the right front channel 728 shown in FIG. 119 (B), passes through the base member general winning opening 704, and flows down to the main body 760 side. Further, the winning ball flows down the right back channel 705, passes through the right housing opening 732 formed in the housing 731 and is collected together with other out balls. The right front flow path 728 is provided with a winning opening switch 35a, which detects a game ball won in the general winning opening 35.

  As shown by a double-ended arrow “W” in FIG. 119 (B), for example, an opening is formed upward with a width corresponding to four game balls. The game ball that has fallen into the opening passes through the big prize opening switch 35a, flows down the central front channel 727, passes through the base member big prize opening 706, and flows down to the main body 760 side. Further, the winning ball flows down the central back channel 707, passes through the lower housing opening 733 formed in the housing 731 and is collected together with other out balls.

  The tongue-like member 741 passes through the base member 701 by passing through the base member tongue-like opening 703 formed in the base member 701, and the front of the opening 703 functions as the open / close door 38c. The open / close door 38c opens and closes when the tongue-like member 741 moves back and forth by the power of the lower large prize opening solenoid 38b provided in the open / close door unit 740. The open / close door unit 740 is covered from the back side by a solenoid cover 771, and the lower large prize opening solenoid 38 b is received by a receiving portion 771 a formed in the housing 771.

  Next, the structure and operation mechanism of the tongue member 741 will be described. 121A and 121B are views for explaining the structure of the tongue-like member 741 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 121A is a plan view and FIG. 121B is a front view.

  The tongue-like member 741 is a movable member whose front side functions as the open / close door 38c. The front side of the tongue-like member 741 is formed one step lower by a step 743, and a raised portion 742 is formed at the tip of the one step lower surface. As shown in FIG. 121 (B), the tongue-like member 741 is formed so as to be inclined downward in the left direction when viewed from the front, and causes the game ball to flow down to the left direction of the ball passage 724 when the open / close door 38c is closed. An engaged portion 741b with which an engagement shaft 749 (see FIGS. 122 and 123) is engaged is formed at the center lower portion of the tongue-shaped member 741, and the power of the lower big prize winning solenoid 38b is transmitted.

  The step 743 has a saw-tooth shape in plan view, but each depression as the step 743 weakens the downward force of the game ball and prevents the so-called ball bite that completely stops the game ball from flowing down. It is formed with an obtuse angle with respect to the flow direction (left direction) without combining only right angles. In other words, if the step 743 is formed by a U-shape that combines only a right angle with the shape in plan view, the game ball may completely stop at the U-shape and cause the occurrence of a ball bite. A release portion 743a is formed on the front side so that the width of the step 743 is widened so that the game ball flows in the downward direction.

  The release portion 743a also has a function of rolling the game ball flowing down from the right direction and entering the opening of the step 743 forward (obliquely forward), and is provided at a position corresponding to each opening of the step 743. Together with the part 742, the game ball is meandered.

  In consideration of the time when the tongue member 741 is passed through the base member tongue opening 703, the height of the raised portion 742 is the same as the height of the step 743, but the height of the raised portion 742 is higher than the height of the step 743. It may be high or low. Since the raised portion 742 is a portion where the game ball flowing down the ball passage 724 particularly comes into contact, if the raised height is high, the downward force of the game ball can be weakened. Further, the raised portion 742 may not be raised upward with respect to the tongue-like member 741, but may be a recessed portion that gently sinks downward.

  FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the opening / closing door unit 740 for explaining the operation in the front-rear direction of the tongue-shaped member 741 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 122 (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the tongue-shaped member 741 has advanced. These are figures of the state which the tongue-like member 741 moved backward. FIG. 123 is a view for explaining the engaging shaft 749 of the second embodiment, (A) is a front view of the opening / closing door unit 740, and (B) is a tongue-like member 741 along the line AA. It is sectional drawing of the engaging shaft 749. FIG. FIG. 124 is a bottom view of the opening / closing door unit 740 of the second embodiment, in which (A) shows a state in which the tongue-like member 741 has moved forward, and (B) shows a state in which the tongue-like member 741 has moved backward. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the engaging shaft 749 is engaged with the engaged portion 741b formed at the lower center of the tongue-shaped member 741, and the power of the lower large prize opening solenoid 38b is transmitted to the tongue-shaped member 741. Is done.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 124, the lower large prize opening solenoid 38b is disposed so that the plunger (movable iron core) 746 can move in the left-right direction, and the other end of the second arm 747 attached to the tip of the plunger 746. Is connected to the second arm 748. Like the plunger 746, the second arm 747 can move only in the left-right direction. However, since the second arm 748 rotates the engagement shaft 749 in the front-rear direction by the shaft portion 748a, the tongue-like member 741 also moves in the front-rear direction. To do.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), when the tongue-shaped member 741 is moving forward, the big prize opening is closed, and conversely, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the tongue-shaped member 741 is closed. When is moving backwards, the big prize opening is open.

  Next, the behavior of the game ball flowing down the ball passage 724 will be described. FIG. 125 is a plan view of the special variable winning device unit 700 with the open / close door 38c of the second embodiment closed. FIG. 126 is a plan view showing a state where two game balls are flowing down, and FIG. 127 is a perspective view thereof.

  FIG. 128 is a view for explaining the rolling state of the game ball in the ball passage 724 with the open / close door 38c of the second embodiment closed, and FIG. 128 (A) is a front view of the special variable winning device unit 700. B) is a cross-sectional view at A-A.

  When the game ball rolls without splashing in the ball passage 724 with the open / close door 38c closed, the game ball comes into contact with the back surface of the raised portion 742, the step 743, and the upper side wall 722. Will roll. When the downflow force is strong, the back side protrusion 702 is contacted beyond the step 743, but still follows a course that approximates the course of the arrow.

  126 and 127 show a state in which the game ball is actually flowing down the ball passage 724. The width of the ball passage 724 is about 1.25 times the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is inserted into the open / close door 38c. It turns out that it rolls in the front-rear direction while flowing down to the left direction, meanders in a zigzag and passes through the ball passage 724 without being busy.

  When this is confirmed from the side, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), the width from the ridge of the back-side ridge member 702 to the back of the upper side wall 722 is narrowed to a width that allows a game ball to pass through. If a downward flow force is strong even when a game ball passes in front of the rear side protrusion member 702, the downward force is reduced by abutting against the rear surface protrusion member 702.

[Game control device]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system of the game control device 100 according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, although the example of a structure of the control system of the game control apparatus 100 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated, unless there is particular notice, a structure is a structure common to the thing of 1st Embodiment.

  In 2nd Embodiment, the gate switch 34a is provided with respect to the game control apparatus 100 of 1st Embodiment. The gate switch 34 is connected to the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121. The gate switch 34a detects a winning to the usual start gate 34. In the second embodiment, a general-purpose solenoid 33b is provided for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment. The general electric solenoid 33b is connected to the first driver 138a.

  Then, as will be described later, when the common random number value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the game control device 100 drives the common electric solenoid 33b to move the movable member 33c for a predetermined time. It is rotated and opened (for example, for 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is changed to an open state in which it is easy to flow into the normal variation winning device 33.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed by winning the winning opening (general winning prize opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 is shown in FIG. The memory is stored. Therefore, the public power prize winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, game state transition (transition) by the above-described game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a transition of the game state in the second embodiment. FIG. 130 summarizes each gaming state, and shows the control by the game control device 100 in each gaming state, the control by the effect control device 300, and the characteristics in the gaming state. In the second embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state.

  First, each gaming state will be described. In the normal gaming state, the game control apparatus 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a low probability and the ordinary power support (electric support) is not provided. In the normal gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. In the normal gaming state, left-handed is recommended as the launch direction. Therefore, since the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, the main variation special chart is a special figure one variation display game.

  In the first specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability, and there is a general electric power support (the support count is 50 times). That is, in the first specific gaming state, it is controlled so that the conversion control by the ordinary electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is executed more than the normal gaming state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. .

  In the first specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probability change mode. In the first specific gaming state, it is recommended that the game ball be fired in the right direction. By making a right turn, it becomes easy to win the normal start gate 34, so the main start area becomes a winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the public power prize winning opening, the main fluctuation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variable display game.

  In the second specific gaming state, the game control device 100 performs control so that the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) is set to a high probability and there is no ordinary power support. That is, when the above-described first specific gaming state shifts to the second specific gaming state, the conversion control by the general electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is returned to the same control as the normal gaming state, and It can be said that the probability state is set to the high probability state (FIG. 133).

  In the second specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to small hit RUSH. As will be described later, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is set to be short in the second specific gaming state, the small hit RUSH can be said to be a state in which small hits are likely to occur continuously in a short time. . As described above, in the second embodiment, when the second specific gaming state is executed, the small hit (first special result) is derived as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). It is possible.

  Also, in the second specific gaming state, it is recommended that the game ball be fired in the right direction. Therefore, the main start area is the second start winning opening 37, and the main variation special chart is a special figure two variation display game.

  In the third specific gaming state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a low probability so that there is a general power support (the support count is 50). In the third specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time reduction mode. In the third specific gaming state, it is recommended that the game ball be fired in the right direction. By making a right turn, it becomes easy to win the normal start gate 34, so the main start area becomes a winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the public power prize winning opening, the main fluctuation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variable display game.

  Next, transition (transition) from each gaming state will be described. Assume that a big hit (second special gaming state) occurs in the normal gaming state. When the big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit state is finished, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit is the normal big hit in the normal gaming state, after the big hit state is finished, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the third specific gaming state.

  When a normal big hit occurs in the first specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state. In addition, when a probable big hit is generated in the first specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts again to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, when the big hit does not occur and the ordinary power support ends, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state (see “High Support Rules” in FIG. 130). The “number of times” ends. “High support” indicates a state where the hit probability is high and there is electric support).

  In other words, in the first specific gaming state, as a condition for transitioning to another gaming state, the occurrence of a big hit (second special gaming state) is a condition (first transition condition), and a predetermined number of ordinary power support In some cases, the condition (second transition condition) is (execution of the variable display game). In this way, for example, the first specific gaming state can be generated after the occurrence of the big hit (second special gaming state) in the normal gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, When the second transition condition is satisfied, the second specific gaming state can be generated.

  In the second specific gaming state, if the big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit is the normal big hit in the second specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state. That is, in the second specific gaming state, the occurrence of a big hit (second special gaming state) is a condition as a transition condition to another gaming state.

  When a probabilistic big hit occurs in the third specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state. Further, when a normal big hit occurs in the third specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts to the third specific gaming state again. On the other hand, in the third specific gaming state, when the big hit does not occur and the ordinary power support ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the “low support prescribed number” in FIG. “End”. Note that “low support” represents a state where the hit probability is low and there is electric support.)

  Since the gaming state shifts in this way, the gaming state can be shifted from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the probability variation big hit has occurred in the normal gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, the ordinary power support is executed and the hit probability is set to a high probability, so that it is easy to generate a big hit. And the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific gaming state, in the second embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state. In the second specific gaming state, although the ordinary power support is not executed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning the second start opening 37. Here, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variable display game is set to a high probability unlike the special figure 1 variable display game (in FIG. 133 described later, the small hit probability is set to a very high probability). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the “small hit RUSH” mode in which a small hit (first special gaming state) is frequently generated until the next big hit occurs. Since the number of balls can be increased in a gaming state other than the big hit (second special gaming state), the gaming machine 10 having a novel gaming property can be provided.

  Also, in the first specific gaming state, there is a general power support, and in the second specific gaming state, there is no general power support in the same way as in the normal gaming state, so a small hit (first special gaming state) Can be executed with a good tempo.

  Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed with the big probability in the second specific gaming state having a high probability state, the big hit (second special gaming state) is generated at an appropriate timing, and another gaming state is entered. The transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of balls due to the excessive continued second specific gaming state.

  Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described. In the process added in the second embodiment and the process described again for easy understanding, “A ******” is given a number in the range of 10,000 after “A”.

[Timer interrupt processing]
A timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) in the second embodiment. FIG. 131 is obtained by adding the process of step A11311 between step A1311 and step A1312 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from step A1301 to A1311 and the processing from step A1312 to A1315 are the same as those in FIG.

  In step A11311, the game control device 100 executes a general game process for performing a process related to the general variable display game (A11311). Details of the normal game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  By doing in this way, in a 2nd embodiment, a usual figure change display game can be performed. Then, when the normal figure variation display game is in a winning mode, the special entry variable display game is made by opening the winning opening (the ordinary winning prize opening) of the normal fluctuation winning device 33 and winning the game ball in the ordinary winning prize opening. Can start.

  In particular, in the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, the ordinary power support is executed (see FIG. 130). In the first specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started frequently by the ordinary power support (electric support), and the hit probability is high, so that it is easy to generate big hits. be able to. Further, even in the third specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be easily generated by the ordinary power support.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 ordinary process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 132A is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 132A is obtained by adding step A13718 to step A3717 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from step A3701 to A3716 is the same as that in FIG.

  Compared with the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in the first embodiment, the contents of the high probability fluctuation count update process (A3717) are partially different in the second embodiment, and a new short time fluctuation count update process (A13718) is added. Has been.

  The high probability variation number update process (A3717) is a process for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game when the hit probability is in a high probability state. The time-varying fluctuation count update process (A13718) is a process of updating the time-shortening fluctuation count, checking the end of public power support, and setting necessary information. The details of the high probability variation number update process (A3717) and the short time variation number update process (A13718) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 134 and 135, respectively.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the high probability variation number update process (A3717) is executed in the special figure 1 variation start process, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number of times.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the time-varying variation number update process (A13718) is executed in the special figure 1 variation start process, so that it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state with the low support prescribed number of times.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 ordinary process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 132B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 132B is obtained by adding the processing of step A13809 after step A3808 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from step A3801 to A3808 is the same as that in FIG.

  The high probability variation number update process (A3808) is a process for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game when the hit probability is in a high probability state. The time-varying fluctuation count update process (A13809) is a process of updating the time shortening fluctuation count, checking the end of the public power support, and setting necessary information. Details of the high probability variation number update process (A3808) and the short time variation number update process (A13809) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 134 and 135, respectively.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the high probability variation number update process (A3808) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start process, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state with a high support prescribed number of times.

  Further, in the second embodiment, since the short time variation frequency update processing (A13809) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start processing, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state with the low support prescribed number of times.

  FIG. 133 is a table illustrating a big hit probability, a small hit probability, a loss probability, and a probability variation probability in the second embodiment. These tables show the big hit probability (probability that the judgment result is a big hit), the small hit probability (probability that the judgment result is a big hit), the loss probability (the judgment result is out of place) by the big hit judgment processing and the small hit judgment processing described above. The probability variation probability (probability change entry rate) is shown for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. FIG. 133 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 133 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state, and FIG. 133 (c) shows the probability variation entry rate.

  Also in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability (the probability of jackpot occurrence) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. Further, the small hit probability (occurrence probability per small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. In addition, the structure which makes small hit probability high in a high probability state, and makes low in a low probability state is also possible. For example, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game in the low probability state may be set to “0”. Also, the loss probability (probability of occurrence) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

  That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second special result) in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first fluctuation display game) or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game). A probability setting means that can be controlled into a low probability state in which the probability of deriving is set to a low probability and a high probability state in which a higher probability is set than the low probability state.

  In the second embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 fluctuation display in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It becomes higher than the game, and the loss probability is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the loss probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to generate a small hit with a very high probability by winning the second start winning opening 37.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 45 described above, in the low probability state, the second half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has long fluctuation (long fluctuation). )become. However, in the high probability state, the second half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, so the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a fluctuation of the normal fluctuation time (short fluctuation compared to the long fluctuation). become. As a result, in the second specific gaming state in the high probability state, small hits occur more frequently (small hit RUSH) in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the low probability state.

  In the second embodiment, after the big hit state is finished, the probability variation state or the normal state is entered. As shown in FIG. 133 (c), the 16R probability variation entry rate is 2% for both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variation entry rate is the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2. The variation display game is 60%. That is, the probability variation entry rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit, the time reduction of 50 revolutions and the public power support are executed.

  The 16R probability change rush rate is, for example, 2% for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and 40% for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the 4R probability change rush rate is, for example, 60% for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. It may be set so that the distribution of the number of rounds of jackpots in the probability variation state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is different, such as 22% in FIG. If configured in this way, if a winning jackpot is won in the small hit RUSH mode, it becomes possible to acquire a large number of game balls even during the big hit game, so more small hits are generated during the small hit RUSH. In addition to improving the game motivation of a player who wants to acquire a game ball, the expectation level for winning a promising big hit can be improved.

  In addition, since the occurrence of a probable big hit will trigger the end of the small hit RUSH mode, the occurrence of the probable big hit may reduce the player's willingness to play, but even with this probable big hit, it is possible to acquire sufficient game balls. Therefore, it is possible to give a new game motivation to enter the small hit RUSH again while maintaining the game motivation of the player.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the high-probability fluctuation number update process (A3717 (Special Figure 1 fluctuation start process), A3808 (Special Figure 2 fluctuation start process)) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in the second embodiment. Details will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of high probability variation frequency update processing in the second embodiment. In the high probability variation number update process, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state (here, the high probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A15101). When the state is not a high probability state (when the state is a low probability state) (the result of A15101 is “N”), the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  When the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A15101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game starting in the high probability state by −1 (1). (A15102). The initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 (described later, special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process) ). Moreover, even if any of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, the high probability fluctuation frequency is updated by -1.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A15103). When the high probability variation number is not 0 (the result of A15103 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 determines the high probability variation number. The update process ends. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A15103 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to high probability and no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15104).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special figure high probability & no time limit flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15105), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the fluctuation. The final variation flag without high probability & short time is set (A15106), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated. The final probability flag without high probability and short time will be described later.

  In this way, by executing the high probability variation number update process in the second embodiment, the second specific gaming state (high probability) is appropriately set from the state of the first specific gaming state (high probability, with electric support). , Without electric support) (especially A15105).

[Short-time fluctuation count update processing]
Next, details of the time-varying number of times update process (A13718 (special figure 1 fluctuation start process)) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of time-varying frequency update processing in the second embodiment.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is short (in a state with low probability and power support) (A15201). If the time is not short (the result of A15201 is “N”), the time-varying number of times update processing is terminated.

  When the game control device 100 is in a short time period (low probability & with electric support) (result of A15201 is “Y”), it updates the time fluctuation number by −1 (subtracts 1) (A15202). The initial value of the number of short-time fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the short-time mode is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to 50, for example (see FIG. 1 Big hit end processing or Special figure 2 in the second embodiment described later). Jackpot end processing). Moreover, even if any of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, the time fluctuation number of times is updated by -1.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time variation is 0 (A15203). If the time variation count is not 0 (the result of A15203 is “N”), that is, if the time variation mode continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 performs time variation variation update processing. finish. When the number of time fluctuations is 0 (result of A15203 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal relating to low probability and no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15204).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special figure low probability & no short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15205), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the fluctuation. A low probability & no short time final variation flag is set (A15206), and the short time variation number update process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the time-varying number of times update processing in the second embodiment, the normal gaming state (low probability, no electric support) from the state of the third specific gaming state (low probability, electric support) appropriately. ) (In particular, A15205).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a part of the high probability variation number process in the first embodiment is changed, and the time variation variation number update process is added. For this reason, as a flag corresponding to the high probability final variation flag in the first embodiment, a high probability & short time final variation flag (A15106) and a low probability & short time final variation flag (A15206) are introduced.

  In order to cope with such a change, in the second embodiment, “high probability final variation?” Of steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A5728, A5745, A5828, A5848 in the first embodiment is “final variation?” To read as The “final variation” is a final variation in which the low probability and short-time state ends, and when the low probability & short-time-less final variation flag is set, it is determined that the final variation in the low probability and short-time state has been completed. In addition, when the high probability & short timeless final variation flag is set, it is determined that the final variation in the high probability and short time state has ended.

  In the second embodiment, “high probability?” In steps A2712, A3514, A3607, A5737, A5837 in the first embodiment is read as “high probability or short?”.

  Further, in the second embodiment, “clear high probability variation number region” in step A5907 in the first embodiment is read as “clear high probability variation number region and short time variation number region”. In the second embodiment, “clear high probability final variation flag region” in step A5909 in the first embodiment is read as “clear final variation flag region”.

  The “final variation flag area” includes a high probability & short time without final variation flag area for storing a high probability & short time final variation flag, and a low probability & short time without final variation for storing a low probability & short time final variation flag. Includes flag area.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 137 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal process (A16701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A16702). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the big hit (off data of 3 big hits per signal of the big hit 1 signal) in the external information output data area (A16703).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16704). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16705). Here, in the second embodiment, there are high probability data (high probability, with electric support) and low probability data (low probability, with electric support) as the probability variation determination data. If the probability variation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“N” in step A16705), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability and short time in the external information output data area. (A16706). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) ("Y" in step A16705), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A16720. The processing after step A16720 will be described later.

  After the process of step A16706, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16707). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability & short time in the test signal output data area (A16708). After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the right handing instruction (launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A16709).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number having a high probability in the game state display number area (A16710), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A16711), and the round LED pointer. The unlit number is saved in the area (A16712). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16713), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring organization flag area (A16714). The area is cleared (A16715).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a flag with a high probability & a short time in the special figure game mode flag area (A16716). As a result, in the first specific gaming state, it is possible to increase the hit probability and execute the ordinary power support. In the first specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for retaining the high probability variation number, and the time variation is performed in the time variation region for retaining the time variation number. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16717). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16718), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved to the special figure 2 game. Save in the processing timer area (A16719) and end the special figure 1 big hit end processing.

  In the above-described step A16705, when the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100 generates a signal regarding the start of low probability and short time. Save in the external information output data area (A16720).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16721). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability & short time in the test signal output data area (A16722). Thereafter, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A16723).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A16724), saves the right-handed number in the game state display number 2 area (A16725), and the round LED pointer. The extinguishing number is saved in the area (A16726). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16727), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud start period flag area (A16728), and the special status is displayed. The area is cleared (A16729).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the low probability & short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16730). As a result, in the third specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the ordinary power support and the time reduction mode. And it is possible to frequently generate the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the low probability variation number is saved in the low probability variation number region for holding the low probability variation number, and the time variation in the short time variation number region for retaining the time variation number is stored. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16731). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure restoration to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure restoration (A16732), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is designated as the special figure 2 game processing. The data is saved in the timer area (A16733), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

  In this way, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)) after the special figure 1 big hit, the hit probability is It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state by setting the high probability and having the ordinary power support. Also, after the special figure 1 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support), the hit probability is set to low probability, and there is a general power support As described above, it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 139 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number to return to the special figure 2 normal process (A16801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A16802). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the big hit (off data of 3 big hits per signal of off data of 1 big hit) in the external information output data area (A16803).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16804). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16805). Here, in the second embodiment, there are high probability data (high probability, with electric support) and low probability data (low probability, with electric support) as the probability variation determination data. When the probability variation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“N” in step A16805), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability and short time in the external information output data area. (A16806). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A16820. The processing after step A16820 will be described later.

  After the process of step A16806, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16807). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability & short time in the test signal output data area (A16808). Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal (launching position designation signal 1) relating to the right-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A16809).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number having a high probability in the game state display number area (A16810), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A16811), and the round LED pointer. The unlit number is saved in the area (A16812). Subsequently, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16813), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring agency flag area (A16814). The area is cleared (A16815).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a flag with high probability & time reduction in the special-purpose game mode flag area (A16816). As a result, in the first specific gaming state, it is possible to increase the hit probability and execute the ordinary power support. In the first specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for retaining the high probability variation number, and the time variation is performed in the time variation region for retaining the time variation number. Is saved (for example, 50 times) (A16817). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16818), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing ends.

  In the above-described step A16805, when the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 generates a signal regarding the start of low probability and short time. Save to the external information output data area (A16820).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16821). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability & short time in the test signal output data area (A16822). Thereafter, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A16823).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A16824), saves the right-handed number in the game state display number 2 area (A16825), and the round LED pointer. The unlit number is saved in the area (A16826). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16827), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud start period flag area (A16828), and the special figure status is displayed. The area is cleared (A16829).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the low probability & short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16830). As a result, in the third specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the ordinary power support and the time reduction mode. And it is possible to frequently generate the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the low probability variation number is saved in the low probability variation number region for holding the low probability variation number, and the time variation in the short time variation number region for retaining the time variation number is stored. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16831). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16832), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing ends.

  In this way, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)), the hit probability is It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state by setting the high probability and having the ordinary power support. In addition, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) after the special figure 2 big hit ends, the hit probability is set to low probability and the general power support is provided , It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the second embodiment. FIG. 140 is obtained by adding the process of step A17207 between steps A7207 and A7208 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from step A7201 to A7207 and the processing from step A7208 to A7210 are the same as those in FIG.

  In step A17207, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the time is short (A17207). If the game control apparatus 100 determines that the time is not short (the result of A17207 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing after step A7208. On the other hand, if the time is short (the result of A17207 is “Y”), the processing after step A7210 is executed.

  In this way, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure 2 small hits end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 141 is obtained by adding the process of step A17308 between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from step A7301 to A7308 and the processing from step A7309 to A7310 are the same as those in FIG.

  In step A17308, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the time is short (A17308). If the game control apparatus 100 determines that the time is not short (the result of A17308 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing after step A7309. On the other hand, if the time is short (the result of A17308 is “Y”). Then, the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

  In this way, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special Figure 1 Big Hit End Process (Modification in Second Embodiment)]
A modified example of the second embodiment of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 142 is a first flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

  142 and 143 are obtained by adding the processes of steps A19719 to A19723 and the processes of steps A19733 to A19737 to the processes of FIGS. 136 and 137. Therefore, the processing from step A16701 to A16718 and from step A16720 to step A16732 is the same as that in FIGS.

  In step A19719, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19719). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19719 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19722). The 2-game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (A19723), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is terminated.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (the result of A19719 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game. A command is prepared (A19720), and an effect command setting process is executed (A19721). The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Thereafter, the processes of steps A19722 and A19723 described above are executed, and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

  In Step A19733, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19733). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19703 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19736). The 2-game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (A19737), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is terminated.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of A19733 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing to restart the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. The command is prepared (A19734), and the effect command setting process is executed (A19735). The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Thereafter, the processes of steps A19736 and A19737 described above are executed, and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

  142 and 143 can be said to be modified so that the modified example of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 1 big hit end process in the first embodiment, the following effect in the second embodiment is obtained. That is, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)) after the special figure 1 big hit ends, the hit probability is set to a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state with the presence of the ordinary power support. In addition, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) after the special figure 1 big hit ends, the hit probability is set to low probability and the general electric power support is provided , It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special Figure 2 Big Hit End Processing (Modification in Second Embodiment)]
A modified example in the second embodiment of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 144 is a first flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 145 is a second flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

  144 and 145 are obtained by adding the processes of steps A19819 to A19722 and the processes of steps A19833 to A19836 to the processes in FIGS. 138 and 139. Therefore, the processing from step A16801 to A16818 and from step A16820 to step A16832 is the same as that in FIG. 138 and FIG.

  In step A19819, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (A19819). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (the result of A19819 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19822). End the big hit end process.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of A19819 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game. A command is prepared (A19820), and an effect command setting process is executed (A19821). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. Thereafter, the process of the above-described step A19822 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end process is ended.

  In step A19833, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (A19833). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (the result of A19833 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19836). End the big hit end process.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of A19833 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game. The command is prepared (A19834), and the effect command setting process is executed (A19835). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. Thereafter, the processing of the above-described step A19836 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

  144 and 145 can be said to be modified so that the modified example of the special figure 2 jackpot end process in the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 2 jackpot end process in the first embodiment, the following effect in the second embodiment is obtained. That is, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with normal power support)) after the special figure 2 big hit ends, It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state with the power support. Also, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with ordinary power support), the hit probability is low probability, and there is general power support, It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special Figure 1 Small Hit End Processing (Modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process according to the modification. FIG. 146 is obtained by adding the process of step A17207 between step A7207 and step A7208 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from step A7201 to A7207 and the processing from step A7208 to S8814 are the same as those in FIG.

  In step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is short (A17207). If the game control apparatus 100 determines that the time is not short (the result of A17207 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing after step A7208. On the other hand, when the time is short (the result of A17207 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step S8810.

  FIG. 146 can be said to be a modification of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, according to the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special Figure 2 Small Hit End Processing (Modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits end process according to the modification. FIG. 147 is obtained by adding the process of step A17308 between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to S8914 are the same as those in FIG.

  In step A17308, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the time is short (A17308). If the game control apparatus 100 determines that the time is not short (the result of A17308 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes after step A7309. On the other hand, when the time is short (the result of A17308 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A8911.

  FIG. 146 can be said to be a modification of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, according to the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (A11310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A17601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 monitors the input from the general power prize opening switch that detects the winning (winning) to the winning opening (the general power prize opening) of the normal variable prize winning device 33. Is executed (A17602). In the second embodiment, unlike the conventional case, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored by winning a prize at the general power prize winning opening. Accordingly, it is assumed that the general power prize winning port is included in the category of the first start winning port 36, and the general power winning port switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a. Details of the power receiving prize switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A17603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (A17604).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (the result of A17604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the ordinary game process number to A general game sequence branch table referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A17605).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A17606). Then, a subroutine call is made with the usual game process number, and a game branching process corresponding to the usual game process number is executed (A17607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the normal map change display game, sets the start of change of the normal view change display game, sets the effect, The usual figure usual process which performs the setting etc. of information required in order to perform the process during a usual figure change is performed (A17608). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A17609). Details of the processing during normal map change will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A17607, the game control device 100 determines whether the current state of the time-variable display game is successful, The processing for displaying a normal map for setting the opening time, setting of information necessary for performing the processing for the normal map, etc. is executed (A17610). Details of the processing for displaying a normal map will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal drawing or to perform the general electric remaining ball process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A17611). Details of the normal processing during the normal drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general electric power remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map (A17612). ). The details of the ordinary figure remaining sphere process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A17608). (A17613). Details of the process for ending the normal drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A17614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A17615), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the normal game process timer is not 0 (the result of A17604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes after step A17614.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A17601 in the usual game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A17701). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A17701 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (A17702). Here, the right-handed gaming state is a big hit state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state. When the game state is a right-handed game (the result of A17702 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A17705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A17702 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A17703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A17704). Receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs a notification (warning) for instructing left-handed using the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 obtains the number of reserved drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is less than an upper limit (for example, 4) (A17705). The game control apparatus 100, when the number of reserved drawings is less than the upper limit (the result of A17705 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved drawings +1 (A17706) and corresponds to the updated number of reserved drawings The address of the random number storage area per hit is calculated (A17707). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A17708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A17709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A17701 is “N”), or the game control device 100 determines that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A17705 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (A17602) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general power winning switch monitoring process. Note that, as described above, the public power prize winning switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 129).

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal fluctuation display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 33 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. (A17801). If it is during the usual time (the result of A17801 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the common power prize winning switch (A17802). When there is an input to the general power prize winning switch (the result of A17802 is “Y”), the count number of the general power counter is updated by one (A17803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated count of the general-purpose counter has reached an upper limit (for example, 6) (A17804). When the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A17804 is “Y”), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the normal end pointer area in the RWM, and is stored in the RWM. Is saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (A17805).

  Finally, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared (A17806), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, when there is a general winning prize exceeding the upper limit during the normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal processing control pointer area at that time, and the normal variation winning device 33 is closed. So that the hit state of the usual figure ends in the middle.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting the normal map (the result of A17801 is “N”), the game control device 100 is determined that there is no input to the general power entry prize switch (the result of A17802 is “N”). ), Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (the result of A17804 is “N”), the power receiving switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A17608) in the usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a routine for ordinary processing.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A17901). If the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (the result of A17901 is “N”), a random number is loaded from the RWM random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and the random number storage area of the RWM per symbol The random number random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the regular symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common figure after loading are cleared to 0 (A17902). ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a short time state (normal power support state) Is determined (A17903). The probability per ordinary figure during the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per ordinary figure during the low probability is 0/251.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251), which is a lower limit determination value in the general figure low probability, when the normal probability is not high (the result of A17903 is “N”) (A17904). If the normal probability is high (the result of A17903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the normal probability is set (A17905). Transition to processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or larger than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A17906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of ordinary figures and the low probability of ordinary figures. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (the result of A17906 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step A17908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A17906 is “N”), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A17907).

  When the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A17907 is “Y”), that is, in the case of a loss, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A17908). Further, the stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A17909), the off symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A17910), and the process proceeds to step A17914.

  When the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A17907 is “N”), that is, in the case of winning, the game control device 100 saves the winning flag area and saves the information (A17911). The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A17912), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A17913), and the process proceeds to step A17914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and in this embodiment, there are three (1 per universal, 2 per universal, 3 per universal).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol region (A17914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data region (A17915), and shifts the random number storage region per universal symbol. (A17916) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A17917), the number of reserved drawings is updated by -1 (A17918).

  That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A17919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the usual game process timer area (A17920). For example, the variation time is distributed to 500 msec with probability 200/256, 1500 msec with probability 40/256, and 3000 msec with probability 16/256. Then, the process for setting the transition to the normal process is executed (A17921), and the normal process is terminated. In addition, the process transition setting process during normal map change will be described later.

  In addition, when the number of pending charts is 0 (the result of A17901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the usual chart process (A17922). The process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A17923). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A17924), and the normal processing is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process for changing the process for changing the normal map. The processing for changing the process for changing the normal map is executed in step A17921 in the normal process for the normal map shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the process number for shifting to the process of changing the usual figure (A18101), and saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A18102).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the normal variation display game (normal symbol 1 variation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (A18103), and the general variation display game is changing. The changing flag indicating this is saved in the usual variable control flag area (A18104). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the normal display, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (A18105), and the initial value (here) Then, 0) is saved (A18106). Thereafter, the process transition setting process during normal map termination is completed.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the normal-fluctuating process (A17609) in the normal-game process will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of processing during normal map change.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying the normal diagram (A18301), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A18302). After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the normal figure display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal figure change display game on the normal figure display, in the normal game process timer area (A18303) .

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the normal change (normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A18304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the normal-variation display game is stopped is saved in the normal-variation control flag area (A18305), and the normal-variation processing is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for displaying a normal map (A17610) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the normal map display process.

  The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing (A18401), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A18402). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set for the loaded hit flag (A18403).

  When the hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A18403 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the hit processing setting table (A18404), and the hit control corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is set. A start pointer value (here, a value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per normal map) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (A18405). Further, a hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal stop symbol information (here, a value corresponding to each of the normal symbols 1, 2, and 3) is acquired and saved in the end stop area for each normal symbol (A18406). Next, the time for opening the electric train corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information (here, the values corresponding to each of the general-purpose symbols 1, 2, and 3) is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A18407). With the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 33 in the probability changing state or in the short time state (in the normal power support state) is set, and for example, it can be opened three times or twice.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 sets “3” as the process number for shifting to the process during the normal game (A18408), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A18409). Thereafter, a signal relating to the hit of the normal variation display game (ordinary signal per ordinary symbol is turned on) and a signal relating to the start of ordinary electric operation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A18410). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid 33b, the on data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (A18411).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 (A18412), and the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 in the normal power fraud monitoring period is obtained. The stored information on the ordinary electric power illegal winnings area is cleared (A18413). Finally, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 33 is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A18414).

  When no hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A18403 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the normal routine process (A18415). The processing number is saved in the usual game processing number area (A18416). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A18417), and the normal diagram display processing is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal game hitting process (A17611) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal hit processing.

  First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a control pointer during a normal figure (A18601), and the value of the loaded control pointer during a normal figure is a value in the control pointer upper limit value area during a normal figure (end of hit). It is determined whether or not (A18602).

  When the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the upper limit area for the control pointer during the normal map (the result of A18602 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the control during the normal map. The pointer is updated by +1 (A18603). Further, the ordinary power operation transition setting process is executed (A18604), and the process during the normal figure is terminated. The details of the ordinary power operation setting process will be described later.

  In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the normal figure reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A18602 is “Y”), Without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area in step A18603, the normal power operation transition setting process is executed (A18604), and the normal process in normal map is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A18604) in the normal map processing will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ordinary power operation transition setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 33b for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 33, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control apparatus 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A18701). Here, the value before updating in step A18603 is used as the control pointer. If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2, or 5, the process proceeds to step A18702 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 33, so that the normal variation winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time (for example, 300 msec) after closing is saved in the usual game process timer area (A18702).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general power solenoid 33b (A18703), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 moves to step A18704 and controls the release of the normal variation winning device 33, so that it corresponds to the control pointer. The normal power open time (for example, 1700 msec), which is the open time of the normal variation winning device 33, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A18704). Further, on-data is set in the normal-power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal-power solenoid 33b (A18705), and the normal-power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A18706 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 33, and therefore the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer. The open time (for example, 2600 msec) which is the open time of 33 is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A18706). Further, ON data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn ON the normal power solenoid 33b (A18707), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  Further, if the value of the control pointer is any of 4 and 7, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A18708, ends the release control of the normal variation winning device 33, and performs the ordinary electric ball remaining processing ( In order to execute A17612), “4” is set as the process number (A18708), and the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A18709).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the ordinary power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the ordinary game processing timer area (A18710). Thereafter, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in order to set the general-purpose solenoid 33b to off (A18711), and the general-purpose operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (A17612) in the ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process number “5” related to the process for ending the normal game (A18901), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A18902). Thereafter, the usual time ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the usual time game processing timer area (A18903).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 33 (the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A18904). Subsequently, the normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning apparatus 33 is cleared (A18905), and further, the normal control pointer area is cleared (A18906). After that, the normal pointer end pointer area is cleared (A18907), and the general electric power remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (A17613) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the end processing for the normal drawing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “0” related to the usual figure normal process (A19101), and further saves the process number in the usual figure game process number area (A19102). After that, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (A19103).

  In addition, the game control device 100 saves a flag (the fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation prize winning device 33 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A19104), and thereafter the per-figure end processing. Exit.

[Function and effect]
Hereinafter, the function and effect of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 159 is a time chart of the operation of the first special variable winning device 38 in the small hit RUSH. In FIG. 159, in order to explain the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the second specific gaming state, the execution state and stop state of the special figure 2 variable display game (described as “special figure 2 game”), The state of execution of the small hitting operation, the opening / closing state of the lower large winning opening (the winning opening of the first special variable winning apparatus 38), and the state of the game ball near the opening / closing door of the lower large winning opening are shown.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment converts the open / close door (open / close member) 38c from the closed state to the open state when the small hit (first special game state) is generated. A winning device 38 is provided. The first special prize-winning device 38 has a configuration in which a game ball stays on the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c when the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c is closed. Further, the game balls staying on the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c when the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c is in an open state can be won. Thereby, even if the open state is short, the game balls staying in the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c can win a lot of game balls by winning the first special winning device 38. In the specific game state, the number of balls can be increased efficiently.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the aforementioned small hit RUSH is generated in the second specific gaming state, the variation starts each time the second start winning opening 37 is won. As shown in FIG. 133, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set to be extremely high in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and the special figure 2 is set in the second specific gaming state. The fluctuation of the fluctuation display game is set to a short fluctuation. Therefore, small hitting operations occur one after another.

  When a small hit occurs, the big prize opening is opened a plurality of times (for example, eight times) for each small hit. During the small hitting operation (first special game state), the time of the lower special winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is set shorter than the time of the closed state. For example, while the closing time of the lower prize winning opening is 1.2 seconds, the opening time can be 0.2 seconds.

  As described above, the special variable winning device unit 700 that constitutes the first special variable winning device 38 is configured to weaken the downward force of the game ball on the open / close door 38c. Thereby, the game ball is likely to stay on the open / close door 38c.

  In such a configuration, when a small hit RUSH occurs where a small hit occurs at a high frequency, the closed state time of the lower prize winning opening is set longer than the open state time, so there is much time for the closed state. Can be retained on the open / close door 38c. Thereafter, since the open / close door 38c is opened, many game balls staying on the open / close door 38c win the lower large winning opening at once. Thereby, when a small hit RUSH is generated, a lot of prize balls can be given to the player.

  By doing so, in the probability variation loop type gaming machine 10 as in the second embodiment, the small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after exiting the first specific gaming state. , It is possible to realize a new gameability that a game ball can be acquired as it gets stuck.

  Referring to FIG. 159, when a small hit occurs in a predetermined variation display game and a small hit occurs in the next variation display game of the predetermined variation display game, in the next variation display game, A period for securing the flow and staying state of the game ball can be secured according to the variation period of the identification information. Thereby, when the small hit operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the open / close door 38c by using the variation time of the later game. Then, a lot of game balls staying on the open / close door 38c can be awarded to the lower prize opening at a stretch, and a lot of prize balls can be given to the player.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, after the end of the big hit (second special game state), when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state, Since the transition is made to the second specific gaming state from which the first special result) can be derived, a novel gaming state transition that is not possible in the past can be performed. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) to which many small hits are allocated can be efficiently changed.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, according to the present invention, a V-type winning opening can be opened by winning a prize at the starting prize opening of a special type 2 type mixer (that is, a special figure 2 starting prize opening), and corresponding to the special figure 2 big hit of the present embodiment by winning at the V winning opening. It is also applicable to models that generate big hits (per V). The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 Production buttons 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 First start prize opening (first start prize area)
37 Second start prize opening (second start prize area)
38 1st special variation winning device 39 2nd special variation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 44 board directing device 46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Dispensing control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (4)

A variable display device capable of executing a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on winning a game ball in the start winning area;
Game control means capable of executing execution control of the variable display game;
Effect control means capable of executing effect control in the variable display device based on a control command from the game control means,
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result determined in advance,
The start prize area includes a plurality of first start prize areas and a second start prize area,
The special game state is
A first special game state that can be generated when the result of the variable display game is a first special result, and that can give a predetermined game value to the player;
A second special game state that can be generated when the result of the variable display game is a second special result, and that can give a game value more advantageous to the player than the first special game state; Prepared,
The game control means includes
First execution control means for performing execution control of the first variable display game based on winning of the game ball in the first start winning area;
Second execution control means for performing execution control of the second variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning area;
Specific game state generating means for generating a specific game state capable of proceeding with the game in a situation more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the second special game state,
The specific gaming state is
As a transition condition to another gaming state, a first specific gaming state where the occurrence of the second special gaming state is a first transition condition, and the execution of a predetermined number of variable display games is a second transition condition;
A transition condition to another gaming state, and a second specific gaming state having a transition condition of occurrence of the second special gaming state,
The specific game state generating means is capable of generating the first specific game state after the second special game state is generated, and when the second transition condition is satisfied in the first specific game state, The second specific gaming state can be generated;
The gaming machine characterized in that the second execution control means can derive the first special result as a result of the second variable display game when the second specific gaming state is executed. Among the plurality of first start winning areas, at least a part of the first start winning area is configured as an ordinary variable winning device having a movable member capable of converting between a closed state and an open state,
The game control means includes conversion control means for performing control to convert the normal variation winning device based on a predetermined lottery result,
The first specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the conversion control by the conversion control means is controlled to be executed more than the normal gaming state,
The said specific game state generation means returns the conversion control by the said conversion control means to the same control as a normal game state, when the said 2nd specific game state generate | occur | produces. Gaming machine. In the case of generating the first special gaming state, comprising a special variable winning device that converts the opening and closing member from a closed state to an open state,
The special variable winning device is:
When the opening and closing member is in a closed state, the game ball stays on the opening and closing member,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game ball staying on the opening / closing member is configured to be able to win a prize when the opening / closing member is in an open state.   4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein, in the first special gaming state, the open time of the special variable winning device is shorter than the closed time.

Images